CMW DataApplicationUnit UserManual V3!5!21 en 14

R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Data Application Unit

User Manual
(;L2)
User Manual
Test & Measurement
1173.9528.02 14
This user manual describes the following R&SCMW options:
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D (Data Application Unit H450A/B/D)
R&SCMW-KA065 (Enabling test software for WLAN Offloading)
R&SCMW-KA100 (Enabling of IP-data interface for IPv4)
R&SCMW-KA120 (Access to DAU on separate CMW)
R&SCMW-KA150 (Extension of IP-data interface for IPv6 and IP multicast)
R&SCMW-KAA20 (IMS basic service)
R&SCMW-KAA21 (IMS advanced service)
R&SCMW-KAA30 (eMBMS service)
R&SCMW-KM050 (IP based measurements)
R&SCMW-KM051 (IP traffic analysis)
R&SCMW-KS104 (EVS speech codec)
2015 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mhldorfstr. 15, 81671 Mnchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
Email: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual: R&SCMW is abbreviated as R&S CMW.
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Contents
Contents
1 Preface.................................................................................................... 7
1.1
R&S CMW Models......................................................................................................... 7
1.2
How to Read Firmware Application Chapters............................................................ 7
1.2.1
General Description........................................................................................................ 8
1.2.2
Application Sheets.......................................................................................................... 8
1.2.3
GUI Reference................................................................................................................ 8
1.2.4
Programming Examples..................................................................................................8
1.2.5
Command Reference...................................................................................................... 9
2 What's New in this Revision................................................................10

3 General Description............................................................................. 11
3.1
Test Setup....................................................................................................................12
3.2
Adapting the DAU IP Configuration...........................................................................16
3.2.1
IPv4 and IPv6 Address Formats................................................................................... 17
3.2.2
IP Address Configuration Methods............................................................................... 18
3.2.3
Assigning an IPv6 Address to a Mobile.........................................................................20
3.3
Configuring and Starting DAU Services................................................................... 21
3.4
Configuring and Running DAU Measurements........................................................ 22
3.5
Using the IMS Server.................................................................................................. 23
3.6
Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload.............................................................. 30
3.7
Using the eMBMS Service.......................................................................................... 31
3.8
Using the Hard Disk of the DAU................................................................................ 33
3.9
Accessing the Built-in Web Server............................................................................34
3.10
Configuring Iperf on the Mobile.................................................................................36
3.11
Configuring Wireshark for IPsec............................................................................... 36
4 GUI Reference...................................................................................... 38
4.1
Data Application Control Dialog................................................................................ 38
4.1.1
Overview Tab................................................................................................................ 39
4.1.2
IP Config Tab................................................................................................................ 40
4.1.3
DNS Tab....................................................................................................................... 46
4.1.4
FTP Tab........................................................................................................................ 50
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Contents
4.1.5
HTTP Tab......................................................................................................................52
4.1.6
IMS Tab.........................................................................................................................53
4.1.7
ePDG Tab..................................................................................................................... 76
4.1.8
Common Softkeys, Hotkeys and Parameters............................................................... 85
4.2
Data Application Measurements................................................................................86
4.2.1
RAN Selection...............................................................................................................86
4.2.2
Overview Tab................................................................................................................ 87
4.2.3
Ping Tab........................................................................................................................88
4.2.4
IPerf Tab....................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.5
Throughput Tab.............................................................................................................94
4.2.6
DNS Requests Tab....................................................................................................... 96
4.2.7
IP Logging Tab..............................................................................................................98
4.2.8
IP Analysis Tab........................................................................................................... 101
4.2.9
IP Replay Tab............................................................................................................. 115
4.2.10
Audio Delay Tab..........................................................................................................118
4.2.11
Network Impairments.................................................................................................. 122
4.2.12
Common Softkeys and Hotkeys..................................................................................124
5 Programming......................................................................................127
5.1
Data Application Control.......................................................................................... 127
5.1.1
Rebooting the DAU..................................................................................................... 127
5.1.2
Configuring General IP Settings..................................................................................127
5.1.3
Configuring IPv4 Settings............................................................................................128
5.1.4
Configuring IPv6 Settings............................................................................................128
5.1.5
Configuring DNS Server Settings................................................................................129
5.1.6
Configuring the FTP Service....................................................................................... 130
5.1.7
Configuring the HTTP Service.................................................................................... 131
5.1.8
Configuring IMS Services............................................................................................131
5.1.9
Configuring the ePDG Service.................................................................................... 135
5.2
Data Application Measurements..............................................................................136
5.2.1
Configuring Global Settings........................................................................................ 136
5.2.2
Configuring Network Impairments...............................................................................137
5.2.3
Performing a Ping Measurement................................................................................ 137
5.2.4
Performing an IPerf Measurement.............................................................................. 138
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Contents
5.2.5
Performing a Throughput Measurement..................................................................... 139
5.2.6
Monitoring DNS Requests...........................................................................................139
5.2.7
Performing IP Logging................................................................................................ 140
5.2.8
Performing IP Replay.................................................................................................. 140
5.2.9
Performing an Audio Delay Measurement.................................................................. 141
5.2.10
Performing IP Analysis................................................................................................142
6 Command Reference......................................................................... 145

6.1
Conventions and General Information....................................................................145
6.1.1
MEAS..................................................................................................................... 145
6.1.2
Keywords.................................................................................................................... 145
6.1.3
Reliability Indicator...................................................................................................... 146
6.2
Data Application Control.......................................................................................... 148
6.2.1
Control of the DAU Unit...............................................................................................149
6.2.2
General IP Settings..................................................................................................... 149
6.2.3
IPv4 Settings............................................................................................................... 150
6.2.4
IPv6 Settings............................................................................................................... 154
6.2.5
DNS Server Settings................................................................................................... 159
6.2.6
FTP Service................................................................................................................ 167
6.2.7
HTTP Service..............................................................................................................170
6.2.8
IMS Service.................................................................................................................171
6.2.9
ePDG Service............................................................................................................. 202
6.3
Data Application Measurements..............................................................................212
6.3.1
RAN Selection.............................................................................................................213
6.3.2
Ping Measurement...................................................................................................... 213
6.3.3
IPerf Measurement......................................................................................................218
6.3.4
Throughput Measurement...........................................................................................227
6.3.5
DNS Requests Measurement..................................................................................... 232
6.3.6
IP Logging................................................................................................................... 235
6.3.7
IP Analysis.................................................................................................................. 239
6.3.8
IP Replay.....................................................................................................................258
6.3.9
Audio Delay Measurement..........................................................................................264
6.3.10
Network Impairments.................................................................................................. 269
7 Annex: Network Impairments........................................................... 275
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Contents
7.1
Delay and Jitter......................................................................................................... 275
7.1.1
RTT Without Impairments........................................................................................... 276
7.1.2
RTT With Delay (No Jitter).......................................................................................... 276
7.1.3
RTT With Uniform Jitter Distribution............................................................................277
7.1.4
RTT With Normal Jitter Distribution.............................................................................278
7.1.5
RTT With Pareto Jitter Distribution..............................................................................279
7.1.6
RTT With Pareto Normal Jitter Distribution................................................................. 280
7.2
Reordering Rate........................................................................................................ 281
7.3
Duplicates Rate......................................................................................................... 283
7.4
Packet Loss Rate...................................................................................................... 285
7.5
Corruption Rate.........................................................................................................286
List of Commands..............................................................................289
Index....................................................................................................296
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Preface
How to Read Firmware Application Chapters
1 Preface
The operation of the R&S CMW is described in several user manuals:
The R&S CMW user manual describes the base software, common features of the
firmware applications and basic principles for manual operation and remote control.
There is a separate manual version for each R&S CMW model.
Additional user manuals, like this document, describe the firmware applications.
There is only one version of these manuals for all R&S CMW models.
Rohde & Schwarz provides registered users a "CMW Customer Web" section on
GLORIS, the Global Rohde & Schwarz Information System: https://extranet.rohdeschwarz.com. From this resource, you can download software updates, waveform
library updates and documentation updates, for example updates of this document.
1.1 R&S CMW Models

The R&S CMW software supports several instrument models. Depending on the
model, only a subset of the software packages and software options is allowed.
To check whether this document is relevant for your instrument model and which software options are supported, refer to the preface of your model-specific base user manual. The PDF filename of this manual starts with CMW<Model>_UserManual, for
example CMW500_UserManual.
1.2 How to Read Firmware Application Chapters

Each firmware application is described in a separate chapter. These chapters can be
read independently of each other. However, they are all organized as follows:
1. General Description
2. Application Sheets (optional)
3. GUI Reference
4. Programming Examples
5. Command Reference
The chapters "System Overview" and "Remote Control" in the R&S CMW user manual
provide additional important information independent of the individual firmware applications. The most important parts are referenced by the firmware application descriptions.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Preface
1.2.1 General Description

This section provides a general description of the firmware application, independent of
a specific operation mode (manual or remote control). It gives a high-level introduction
to the capabilities of the firmware application. Background information related to the
network standard is given as far as it is directly related to administrable parameters.
For measurement applications a detailed description of measurement results and a
description of configurable limits is given, including the relation to conformance requirements defined in network standard specifications.
1.2.2 Application Sheets

This optional section provides short application examples for select issues and related
background information.
1.2.3 GUI Reference

The GUI reference describes the manual operation of the firmware application via the
Graphical User Interface (GUI).
The description of a configuration dialog usually starts with a screenshot presenting the
preset values of the parameters (sometimes preset values are modified to enable hidden parts of a dialog). Below the screenshot all shown parameters are described. For
each single parameter a link to the corresponding command description in the "Command Reference" is provided. Ranges for numeric parameters and reset values are
given there.
For measurement results links to the corresponding command descriptions are provided (commands to retrieve the results). The measurement results are described in
detail in the "General Description".
1.2.4 Programming Examples

The programming examples show how to control and configure the firmware application via a remote-control program and how to retrieve measurement results. The examples consist of comprehensive command sequences. You can check just a single command of a sequence to get an example for the syntax of this single command. But you
can also consider an entire sequence showing the commands in the context of a command script, under consideration of dependencies and required orders of the commands.
The command sequences are written with the intention to list most commands of the
firmware application. They do not show the fastest way for a given configuration task.
The fastest way would use many reset values and omit the corresponding commands.
The examples are referenced by the command descriptions of the "Command Reference".
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Preface
1.2.5 Command Reference

The command reference provides information on the remote commands of the firmware application. The commands are grouped according to their function.
Each command description indicates the syntax of the command header and of the
parameters. For input parameters the allowed ranges, reset values and default units
are listed, for returned values the expected ranges and default units. Most commands
have a command form and a query form. Exceptions are marked by "Setting only",
"Query only" or "Event". Furthermore a link to the "Programming Examples" is provided
and the first software version supporting the command is indicated.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
What's New in this Revision
2 What's New in this Revision

This revision describes version 3.5.21 and later of the "Data Application Unit" firmware
application. Compared to version 3.5.20, it provides the following new features and
changes:
ePDG service:
IMS server:
Configurable IKEv2 attributes for P-CSCF addresses, see P-CSCF IKEv2

Attributes
EVS speech codec, see EVS
New signaling types, see Signaling Type
Configurable transport selection (UDP/TCP), see Transport Selection,

UDP/TCP Threshold
The server can automatically set up a dedicated bearer if an IMS connection is

established, see Dedicated Bearer
Setting up dedicated bearers via the LTE signaling application is no longer
required for data application tests.
Throughput measurement:
Additional commands for trace query with a unique counter value per result,
see FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:
EXTended?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
10
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
3 General Description
The Data Application Unit (DAU, option R&S CMW-B450A or -B450B or -B450D) provides a common data testing solution for supported radio access technologies.
It allows you to test End-to-End (E2E) IP data transfer and to perform user plane (Uplane) tests for an IP connection to a mobile. The connection can be set up via a signaling application or a protocol test application.
The DAU is independent of the underlying radio access network. It provides a common
user plane handling and ensures data continuity during handover from one radio
access technology to another one.
The DAU also hosts IP services that have been optimized for high throughput and are
running in an isolated controlled environment to ensure reproducible test results.
IP services
The following internal IP services are currently available:
File transfer via File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Web browsing via Hypertext Transport Protocol (HTTP)
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) server supporting voice over IMS and SMS over
IMS (R&S CMW-KAA20 required)
DNS server supporting DNS requests of type A, AAAA and SRV
Evolved packet data gateway (ePDG) for WLAN offloading (R&S CMW-KA065
required)
Mini service layer for eMBMS (R&S CMW-KAA30 required)
You can use the FTP and HTTP services for example to access the built-in DAU web
server from the mobile. If desired, you can add own web pages to the server. An additional hard disk provided with the DAU allows the storage of large media files for data
transfer tests.
The IMS server allows an IMS client on the mobile to register to the IMS domain.
Optionally, an authentication can be performed. After successful registration, you can
initiate mobile-originating and mobile-terminating voice over IMS calls. With two registered mobiles, you can perform mobile-to-mobile calls. Short messages over IMS are
also possible.
The DNS server can be used to answer DNS queries for IPv4 addresses, IPv6
addresses and domains supporting a specific service. The DNS server database is
configurable. Thus you can for example redirect the mobile to the web server of the
DAU when it tries to browse a specific Internet domain. DNS queries for which the local
database contains no matching entry can be forwarded to an external DNS server.
The ePDG acts as gateway to an untrusted WLAN network. It provides security mechanisms required for WLAN offloading tests where an IPsec tunnel from the core network through the WLAN network to the DUT must be set up.
The mini service layer for eMBMS provides unicast and multicast services for eMBMS
tests, controlled via CMWcards or via protocol test applications.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
11
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Test Setup
If connected to an external network, the DAU acts as IP gateway, separating the

R&S CMW internal IP network from the external IP network. The mobile can use both
the embedded IP services provided by the DAU and the IP services provided by the
external network. For example it can access web servers and DNS servers both in the
internal network and in the external network.
DAU measurements
For DAU measurements, option R&S CMW-KM050 is required. It provides the following measurement applications for testing the properties of an IP connection to the
mobile:
Ping measurement, testing the network latency
IPerf measurement, testing the throughput and reliability, using TCP/IP and
UDP/IP
Throughput measurement, indicating the total throughput at the DAU on IP level
DNS request measurement, monitoring all DNS queries addressed to the internal
DNS server
IP logging application, creating log files of the IP traffic at the LAN DAU connector
or between DAU and mobile
IP analysis application, monitoring and analyzing the uplink and downlink IP traffic
of the mobile (R&S CMW-KM051 required in addition to R&S CMW-KM050)
IP replay application, replaying IP traffic from packet capture files
Audio delay measurement, analyzing the transit time and timing error of voice call
audio packets
The DAU supports the internet protocols IPv4 and IPv6. Both can be used individually
or in parallel, depending on the IP connection established by the Radio Access Network. IPv4 requires option R&S CMW-KA100, IPv6 requires additionally option R&S
CMW-KA150.
Option R&S CMW-KA150 is also required for IP multicast traffic (IPv4 or IPv6) and
thus for eMBMS tests.
Usually, the DAU is installed on the R&S CMW that establishes the IP connection to
the mobile. If all expansion slots of this R&S CMW are occupied by other hardware
options, a DAU installed on another R&S CMW can be used instead. For such an
"external DAU" setup, option R&S CMW-KA120 is required on both instruments.
You can control the DAU manually via a graphical user interface or remotely via SCPI
commands. Protocol test applications can control the DAU via the CDAU interface.
The following sections describe possible test setups and the related initial configuration
of the network settings. They also provide an introduction to the DAU measurements.
3.1 Test Setup

A standalone test setup comprises the mobile, the R&S CMW and at least one RF connection between them. The mobile can access embedded DAU services, for example
browse pages of the built-in web server or exchange files with the built-in FTP server.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
12
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Test Setup
It depends on the application used to set up the IP connection and its configuration,
whether one or more RF connections are required and which RF connectors can be
used. For details refer to the documentation of the relevant signaling application or to
the protocol test documentation and set up the RF connection(s) as described there.
The used RF path (connector and converter) is known by the used application, but not
by the DAU. The DAU accesses the established IP connection via an internal ethernet
connection to the signaling units.
For scenarios involving only one downlink carrier and one uplink carrier, you use typically an RF COM connector, e.g. RF 1 COM, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1: Test setup, optionally with connection to company LAN
If you want to access external services with the mobile, connect the external network to
the LAN DAU connector at the rear panel of the instrument. Typically, you connect
your company LAN. With this setup, the mobile can access the network connected to
the LAN DAU connector and other networks reachable via this network, e.g. an application server in the internet. It can also access embedded DAU services, as with a
standalone setup.
Note that only the LAN DAU connector allows the DAU and thus the mobile to access
an external network and can be used for U-plane tests. The other LAN connectors of
the instrument cannot be used for this purpose. Especially do never connect your company LAN to the LAN SWITCH connector.
Connecting an external network, or not?
If you use a standalone test setup, you can use the predefined internal IP configuration. The default IP settings of the DAU are compatible to a standalone setup. No IP
network configuration is required. But the mobile can only access the embedded DAU
services, not an external network.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
13
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Test Setup
If you connect an external network, you must configure the IP network settings of the
DAU compatible to the connected network. So more configuration than for a standalone setup is required. In return, the mobile can access the external network.
Table 3-1: Overview of setup characteristics
Standalone test setup
Test setup with external network
No external Ethernet connection is required.
The external network must be connected to the LAN

DAU connector.
The predefined DAU IP configuration is ready-touse.
The DAU IP configuration must be adapted to the

external network.
Dynamic or static IP configuration is possible.
The mobile can only access IP services provided by

the DAU.
The setup, the services and the configuration are
optimized for maximum throughput on IP level.
The mobile can access IP services provided by the

DAU and also IP services running on an external
application server in the company LAN or on the
Internet.
Test setup with external DAU

Usually, the DAU is installed on the R&S CMW that establishes the IP connection to
the mobile (internal DAU). If all expansion slots of this R&S CMW are occupied by
other hardware options, a DAU installed on another R&S CMW can be used instead
(external DAU).
For such an external DAU setup, you need option R&S CMW-KA120 on both
R&S CMW. Both instruments must be equipped with an ethernet switch (option
R&S CMWB660A plus -B661A).
Connect the two ethernet switches via a LAN cable as shown in the following figure. At
the R&S CMW without DAU, connect the LAN REMOTE connector to the ethernet
switch. A short patch cable suitable for this purpose is included in option R&S CMWB661A.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
14
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Test Setup
Figure 3-2: Test setup with external DAU and connection to company LAN
The patch cable is only functional if the "Lan Remote" network adapter is integrated
into the internal IPv4 subnet of the instrument. For configuration of a compatible "Lan
Remote" IP address, refer to the description of the "Setup" dialog in the R&S CMW
user manual.
In the R&S CMW without DAU, you must enable the usage of the external DAU and
enter information about the subnet of the R&S CMW with DAU. These settings are provided by the application that establishes the IP connection, for example the LTE signaling application. Refer to the documentation of that application.
You can connect only one instrument without DAU to an instrument with DAU. You can
use the DAU for IP connections at both instruments, even simultaneously. However,
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
15
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Adapting the DAU IP Configuration
note that the DAU resources are shared by all applications using the DAU. To reach
high data rates, it may be required to use the DAU for one application at a time.
3.2 Adapting the DAU IP Configuration

This section introduces you to configuring the IP network settings of the DAU according to your test setup. Ensure correct settings before using the DAU.
The DAU IP configuration is specified via the "Data Application Control" dialog. You
can either configure the settings manually via the "IP Config" tab of the dialog or you
can use the "Initial Setup Wizard".
Opening the "Data Application Control" dialog
1. Press "Setup" to open the "Setup" dialog.
2. In section "System" press the button "Go to config".
The "Data Application Control" dialog opens.
Configuring the "IP Config" settings via the "Initial Setup Wizard"
1. Open the "Data Application Control" dialog.
2. Press the "Wizard" key at the (soft-)front panel to open the wizard dialog.
3. Select the tab "Application Wizards" and run the "Initial Setup Wizard".
Configuring the "IP Config" settings manually
1. Open the "IP Config" tab of the "Data Application Control" dialog.
2. Press the "Config" hotkey to open the configuration dialog.
3. Configure all settings as desired. There is a tab for IPv4 settings and one for IPv6
settings. If you go from one tab to the other, any changes are lost. So press the
"Apply" button before changing the tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
16
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
a) For a standalone setup, select "Automatic R&S CMW500 Network (standalone)" for IPv4 and IPv6. No further configuration is required.
Figure 3-3: IPv4 tab, standalone setup
Figure 3-4: IPv6 tab, standalone setup
b) For a setup with external network, configure the settings compatible to your
network, either by defining a static configuration or by using dynamic mechanisms supported by your network.
For an introduction to IP address formats and to the IP configuration methods
supported by the DAU, refer to the following sections.
For a description of the "IP Config" tab and its configuration dialog, see Chapter 4.1.2, "IP Config Tab", on page 40.
Please note that your changes may not apply to applications that are already generating a downlink signal. To ensure that your changes are effective for a protocol test,
restart the test. To apply them to a signaling application, switch the downlink signal off
and on again in the signaling application.
3.2.1 IPv4 and IPv6 Address Formats

An IPv4 address is unique within a subnet. The subnet is identified by a subnet mask.
Both parameters consist of 32 bits, typically written in dot-decimal notation.
Example: address = 192.168.168.170, subnet mask = 255.255.255.0, all
addresses from 192.168.168.0 to 192.168.168.255 belong to the subnet.
An IPv6 address consists of 128 bits, typically written in blocks of 4-digit hexadecimal
numbers, separated by a colon. Addresses can be abbreviated by omitting leading
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
17
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
zeros within a block and by replacing consecutive blocks of zeros by a double colon
(only once per address).
Example - the following addresses are equivalent:
fcb1:cafe:0001:86c1:0000:0000:0000:0001
fcb1:cafe:1:86c1:0000:0000:0000:1
fcb1:cafe:1:86c1::1
The initial bits of an address are called prefix and identify the subnet. The maximum
length of the prefix is 64 bits. The remaining bits are called interface identifier and
uniquely identify a link within the subnet.
The DAU must know both its own address and the prefix identifying its subnet. This
information can be combined into a single string by appending the prefix length to the
address. Example: The address fcb1:cafe:1:86c1::1 with the initial 64 bits identifying the subnet can be written as fcb1:cafe:1:86c1::1/64.
IPv6 prefixes are written in the same notation (address + length). Prefixes with less
than 64 bits indicate a whole group of 64-bit prefixes with the same initial digits.
Examples for prefixes:
64-bit prefix: fcb1:cafe:0001:86c1::/64
Abbreviations: ac42:45d2:0001:0000::/64 = ac42:45d2:1:0::/64 =

ac42:45d2:1::/64
Prefix groups: fcb1:cafe:0001::/48 comprises the 64-bit prefixes

fcb1:cafe:0001:0000::/64 to fcb1:cafe:0001:ffff::/64
3.2.2 IP Address Configuration Methods

The DAU must know at least its own IP address and it must have a pool of IPv4
addresses and/or IPv6 prefixes which it can assign to mobiles. This section describes
how the DAU can get this information. It does not describe how an address is assigned
to a mobile, see Chapter 3.2.3, "Assigning an IPv6 Address to a Mobile", on page 20.
In principle, there are three methods how the DAU can get IP address information:
The DAU can use IP addresses/prefixes predefined within its software. This
method is appropriate for a standalone setup. The mobile can address the DAU,
but not any other host.
You can configure static IP addresses/prefixes. With a correct configuration, the

mobile can address both the DAU and also hosts in external networks, reachable
via the LAN DAU connector.
The DAU can request and receive dynamic IP addresses/prefixes from an external
network via the LAN DAU connector. The mobile can address both the DAU and
also hosts in external networks.
The following sections provide more detailed information about the three methods. For
IPv4, the same method is used for DAU addresses and mobile addresses. For IPv6,
you can also combine static and dynamic methods, i.e. use a static configuration of the
DAU address and a dynamic configuration of the mobile prefixes or vice versa. The
predefined configuration always applies to DAU and mobile.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
18
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
The IPv4 and IPv6 configuration are completely independent, so you can use different
methods.
Predefined automatic address configuration
This method can only be used for a standalone setup, without connection of an external network. It is available for IPv4 and IPv6 and configures all address information
automatically. So you do not need to configure any IP addresses or prefixes at the
DAU, neither for the mobile, nor for the DAU.
This method is active by default.
Static address configuration
This method allows you to connect an external network or host to the LAN DAU connector. Configure all addresses and prefixes so that they are compatible to the external
network, typically your company network. It is advisable to contact the network administrator prior to configuration. The default values are usually not compatible to an external network and they are not routable in the Internet. But they can be used when connecting a host directly.
For IPv4, all configured static IP addresses must belong to the connected network.
Enter its subnet mask, specify the DAU address and define the mobile address pool. In
order to access internet servers, specify also the gateway address.
For IPv6, assign an IPv6 address to the DAU and define the IPv6 prefix pool for
mobiles. The DAU must belong to a subnet of the external network. For communication
with hosts outside of this subnet, specify an adequate default router belonging to the
subnet of the DAU. Additionally you may configure routes to other default routers or
instruments equipped with a DAU, see "Routing configuration" on page 20.
Dynamic address configuration
This method allows you to connect an external network or host to the LAN DAU connector. Addresses and prefixes are requested from the external network.
For IPv4, the IP address information is configured dynamically using DHCPv4. A
DHCP server must be available in the external network.
For IPv6, the DAU performs IPv6 autoconfiguration. It obtains IP address information
via Router Advertisements (RA) and/or via DHCPv6. The external network must either
contain a router supporting router advertisements or a DHCPv6 server - or both, configured compatible to each other.
Example, RA + DHCPv6: The router advertisement contains an IPv6 prefix and allows
the host (the DAU) to generate its own address using this prefix. It also indicates that
stateful configuration (DHCPv6) must be used to obtain optional information, like DNS
server addresses.
Depending on the content of the router advertisements, it may happen that the DAU
ends up with two assigned IPv6 addresses: one assigned via router advertisements
and one assigned via DHCPv6. In that case, both addresses are displayed in the "IP
Config" tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
19
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Dynamic configuration of the IPv6 prefix pool for the mobiles can be done via DHCP
prefix delegation. The external network must contain a router supporting prefix delegation via DHCPv6. The router delegates an IPv6 prefix to the DAU, typically with less
than 64 bit. The DAU is allowed to create 64-bit prefixes from the delegated prefix and
to assign the prefixes to mobiles.
Routing configuration
For IPv4, no routes need to be defined manually. The mobile, the DAU and external
network nodes connected to the DAU belong to the same subnet. So they know how to
reach each other. The configured gateway allows you to reach destinations outside of
the subnet.
For IPv6, the mobile and the DAU belong to different subnets. Thus some administration may be required to ensure that packets addressed to a specific mobile are routed
to the DAU where the mobile is connected. The administration tasks to be performed
depend on the use case and the configuration of the external network. Basically, you
must ensure that packets with a mobile IPv6 prefix as destination are routed to the correct DAU.
At the DAU, you can configure manual routes for packets sent by the mobile. To configure routes makes sense for destination addresses that do not belong to the subnet
of the DAU and cannot be reached via the configured default router. You could for
example route traffic for certain destinations to a different default router. Or you could
route packets for another mobile connected to another R&S CMW/DAU to that DAU.
Example: The mobile prefix pool of another DAU contains 64 bit prefixes starting with
fcb1:abab:cdcd. To create routes for all these prefixes, create a single route for the
prefix fcb1:abab:cdcd::/48 and specify the IP address of the other DAU as router
address.
3.2.3 Assigning an IPv6 Address to a Mobile

According to 3GPP, the standard method for IPv6 address assignment is the IPv6
stateless address autoconfiguration. This method is used by the DAU to assign IPv6
addresses to a mobile. The optional method stateful IPv6 address assignment
(DHCPv6) is not supported by the DAU.
The DAU uses stateless address autoconfiguration as specified in 3GPP TS 23.401
and 3GPP TS 23.060. The 3GPP specification of the method differs slightly from the
definition in RFC4862.
The assignment of an IPv6 address consists of the following steps:
1. The mobile requests to be connected to an IP network and sets the PDP type to
IPv6 or to IPv4v6. This indicates that the mobile supports IPv6 and must be
assigned an IPv6 address.
2. The DAU sends an IPv6 interface identifier to the mobile.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
20
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Configuring and Starting DAU Services
The interface identifier is a 64-bit value. It is sent via a NAS signaling message.
The used message depends on the RAT. Examples:
For GSM or WCDMA: "Activate PDP Context Accept"
For LTE: "Establish Default EPS Bearer Context Request"
3. The DAU sends an IPv6 prefix to the mobile.
The prefix is a 64-bit value. It is sent after the flow activation (bearer establishment)
in an ICMPv6 router advertisement message.
Any subsequent router advertisement messages also include the prefix. They are
sent to the mobile periodically and if the mobile sends a router solicitation message.
4. The mobile composes an IPv6 address.
It uses the received interface identifier to form a link-local IPv6 address as follows:
fe80::<interface identifier>.
Additionally, the mobile can form a global IPv6 address. For the global address, the
mobile must use the received prefix and can use the received interface identifier or
select a different one. The address is combined as follows:
<prefix>::<interface identifier>.
Example: Prefix fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::/64, interface identifier 1
Global IPv6 address fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::1/64
3.3 Configuring and Starting DAU Services

To use an internal IP service provided by the DAU such as FTP or HTTP, you must
configure and start the service. This is done via the "Data Application Control" dialog.
See also "Opening the "Data Application Control" dialog" on page 16.
To configure a DAU service, select the corresponding tab of the "Data Application Control" dialog, e.g. "FTP". Then configure the settings available directly in the tab or
accessible via the "Config" hotkey.
Start the DAU service by selecting the corresponding softkey, for example, "FTP Service" and press ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP to change the state of the service.
Alternatively, right-click the softkey.
For a detailed description of the service tabs, see Chapter 4.1, "Data Application Control Dialog", on page 38.
See also:
Chapter 3.5, "Using the IMS Server", on page 23
Chapter 3.6, "Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload", on page 30
Chapter 3.7, "Using the eMBMS Service", on page 31
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
21
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Configuring and Running DAU Measurements
3.4 Configuring and Running DAU Measurements

As a prerequisite for any measurements, you must prepare the physical test setup and
configure the DAU network settings according to your test setup (see Chapter 3.1,
"Test Setup", on page 12 and Chapter 3.2, "Adapting the DAU IP Configuration",
on page 16).
The configuration of the DAU network settings must be complete before switching on
the downlink signal and establishing a connection to the mobile via a signaling application or protocol test application.
DAU measurements require option R&S CMW-KM050. All measurements are accessible via the tabs of the "Data Application Measurements" dialog.
For a detailed description of all parameters and results, see Chapter 4.2, "Data Application Measurements", on page 86.
Performing an end-to-end data transfer test with a signaling application
1. Configure the signaling application as desired.
Usually, you must enable end-to-end tests in the signaling application. Example: in
the LTE signaling application, set parameter "Connection Type" to "Data Application".
2. Use the signaling application to establish a connection to the mobile.
3. Find out which IP address has been assigned to the mobile. This information is
required for configuration of most DAU measurements.
Some signaling applications provide the assigned IP address in their main view.
Alternatively, a PC connected to the mobile can be used to retrieve the information.
At a PC with Windows operating system, the command IPconfig can be used.
4. Open the "Data Application Measurements" dialog.
For detailed steps see "Opening the "Data Application Measurements" dialog"
on page 23.
5. At the top of the GUI, select the used signaling application via the parameter
"Select RAN".
The expected maximum throughput at the physical layer is displayed for information. It results from the current signaling settings.
6. Configure and start a DAU measurement, for example "Ping" or "IPerf".
For most measurements, you must enter the IP address of the mobile to select the
IP connection to be analyzed.
See also "Configuring and starting a DAU measurement" on page 23.
Performing a U-plane test with a protocol test application
The following procedure assumes that the protocol test establishes a connection to the
mobile at IP level.
1. Configure and start the protocol test in the usual way. There are no specific settings required for cooperation with the DAU.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
22
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Using the IMS Server
2. Find out which IP address has been assigned to the mobile. You may for example
check the message log files created by the protocol test.
3. Open the "Data Application Measurements" dialog.
For detailed steps see "Opening the "Data Application Measurements" dialog"
on page 23.
4. Configure and start a DAU measurement, for example "Ping" or "IPerf".
For most measurements, you must enter the IP address of the mobile to select the
IP connection to be analyzed.
See also "Configuring and starting a DAU measurement" on page 23.
Protocol tests may also integrate DAU measurements into their test sequence. In that
case, the protocol test controls the DAU via the so-called CDAU interface to configure
the measurement settings and retrieve the measurement results.
While the CDAU interface is used, the GUI of the DAU is hidden in a similar way as
during a remote control session with SCPI commands. When the GUI is displayed
again, the settings valid prior to the CDAU session are restored automatically and the
displayed results are reset.
Opening the "Data Application Measurements" dialog
1. Press MEASURE to open the "Measurement Controller" dialog.
2. Enable "Data Appl. > Measurements"
3. Press "Data Meas" on the task bar at the bottom.
The "Data Application Measurements" dialog opens. The "Overview" tab provides a
summary of the measurement states.
Configuring and starting a DAU measurement
1. Select the corresponding tab, for example, "Ping".
2. Configure the settings available directly on the tab or accessible via the "Config"
hotkey.
3. Select the topmost softkey, for example "Ping", and press ON/OFF to start the
measurement.
The measurement results are provided in the same tab.
3.5 Using the IMS Server

The internal IMS server of the DAU simulates parts of an IMS network, especially a
PCSCF. It allows an IMS client on the mobile to register to the IMS domain. Option
R&S CMW-KAA20 is required for usage of the IMS server.
With a registered mobile, you can test voice over IMS and SMS over IMS. You can
perform mobile-originating calls as well as mobile-terminating calls. If you register two
mobiles, you can also perform mobile-to-mobile calls.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
23
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
This section provides an overview of the IMS server settings, followed by several basic
step-by-step procedures:
"Registering a mobile to the IMS server" on page 25
"Setting up a mobile-originating voice over IMS call" on page 26
"Setting up a mobile-terminating voice over IMS call" on page 27
"Upgrading an audio call to a video call" on page 28
"Sending a short message (SMS) to the mobile" on page 28
"Sending a short message from the mobile to the DAU" on page 29
IMS server settings overview

The IMS settings are divided into the following parts:
General settings
The "Config" hotkey accesses the general settings. They select whether the internal IMS server or an external IMS network is used.
The remainder of this section assumes that you use the internal IMS server.
For a GUI description, see Chapter 4.1.6.5, "General IMS Settings", on page 57.
P-CSCF settings
The "P-CSCF" hotkey accesses settings related to the simulated P-CSCF. They
define the P-CSCF address and the reaction of the P-CSCF on incoming SIP messages from a mobile.
You can define several P-CSCF profiles with different addresses and settings. A
list of all P-CSCFs is sent to the mobile. The mobile selects a P-CSCF from the list
for registration.
Two P-CSCF profiles are predefined and ready-to-use, one for IPv4 and one for
IPv6.
For a GUI description, see Chapter 4.1.6.6, "P-CSCF Settings", on page 58.
Subscriber settings
The "Subscriber" hotkey accesses settings related to the tested mobiles. They
define the private user ID, the public user IDs and authentication settings.
You can define several subscriber profiles, for example if you use SIM cards with
different properties. If all your test SIM cards have the same properties, one subscriber profile is sufficient.
The applicable profile is selected via the user ID included in SIP messages from
the mobile.
For a GUI description, see Chapter 4.1.6.7, "Subscriber Settings", on page 61.
Virtual subscriber settings

The "Virtual Subscriber" hotkey accesses settings related to simulated subscribers.
A virtual subscriber can call a tested mobile and it can be called from a tested
mobile.
The settings include for example the public user ID via which the virtual subscriber
can be reached, the reaction of the virtual subscriber to a call and codec settings.
You can define several virtual subscriber profiles and use a specific profile for a
call.
For a GUI description, see Chapter 4.1.6.8, "Virtual Subscriber Settings",
on page 64.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
24
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Registering a mobile to the IMS server

Perform the following steps to register a mobile to the IMS server. The IMS registration
is a prerequisite for voice over IMS and SMS over IMS.
Initial situation: The mobile is switched off and connected to an RF port. There is no
downlink signal. The IMS server is set to default settings and switched off. The GUI
shows the "IMS" tab of the "Data Application Control" dialog.
1. Press the "Subscriber" hotkey.
A dialog box opens. Configure a subscriber profile as follows (e.g. "Subscriber 1"):
a) Enter the private user ID of your mobile.
b) Configure the authentication settings compatible to your mobile.
c) Enter all public user IDs of your mobile.
For "Subscriber 1", this step is optional, as this profile is used for all unknown
public IDs.
d) Press OK.
2. Press ON | OFF or right-click the "IMS Service" softkey and click ON.
The IMS service is started. Wait until the "IMS Service" softkey displays the state
"ON".
3. Configure the signaling application to be used, for example the LTE signaling application. Usually, you must explicitly enable data tests in the signaling application.
For details, refer to the documentation of the signaling application.
4. Let the mobile register/attach to the signaling application.
Afterwards, the UE automatically registers also to the IMS server. You can check
the successful registration in the "General IMS Info" area on the IMS tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
25
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
The displayed URI is generated automatically and registered in addition to the public user IDs configured for the subscriber profile. Each registration with a different
IP address gets a unique URI, even if the same subscriber profile is used.
If the registration to the IMS fails, see "Troubleshooting a failed registration"
on page 29.
Setting up a mobile-originating voice over IMS call
Initial situation: The mobile has registered to the IMS server. There is only one virtual
subscriber profile "Virtual 1". The GUI shows the "IMS" tab of the "Data Application
Control" dialog.
1. Press the "Virtual Subscriber" hotkey.
A dialog box opens.
2. Configure the "Virtual 1" tab as follows:
a) Set the "Signaling Type" compatible to your mobile (call setup with or without
SIP preconditions).
b) For all other settings, we use the default values:
"Public User ID" = "*"

All calls to public user IDs that are not assigned to any virtual subscriber
will go to this subscriber.
"Behavior" = "Answer"
"Media Endpoint" = "Loopback"
3. At your mobile, initiate a voice call to an arbitrary public user ID.

A new line is added to the "Events" area. After call setup completion, the status in
that line equals "Established".
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
26
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
4. Perform an echo test. Speak a word into the microphone of the mobile and check
that the word is returned to the loudspeaker of the mobile.
For further tests, you can create additional virtual subscriber profiles with a different
behavior or a different media endpoint. Enter a different public user ID for each
profile. To call a specific virtual subscriber, call its public user ID.
Setting up a mobile-terminating voice over IMS call
Initial situation: The mobile has registered to the IMS server. The GUI shows the "IMS"
tab of the "Data Application Control" dialog.
A dialog box opens.
2. Configure the "Virtual 1" tab as follows:
a) Set the "Signaling Type" compatible to your mobile (call setup with or without
SIP preconditions).
b) Configure the audio codec settings compatible to your mobile.
c) For video calls, configure the video codec settings compatible to your mobile.
d) For "Media Endpoint", we use the default value "Loopback".
3. Press the
button.
The mobile-terminating call (MTC) settings of the virtual subscriber are displayed.
Most settings are a copy of the already configured virtual subscriber settings. The
virtual subscriber profile is kept unmodified, even if you change the copied settings
here.
4. Configure the following call settings:
a) Select the "Destination" to be called.
b) Select the "Call Type".
All other call settings are copies of already configured settings.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
27
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
5. Press the "Call" button.

The dialog box is closed and the mobile is alerted.
A new line is added to the "Events" area. The status in that line equals "Ringing".
6. Accept the call at the mobile.
The status in the "Events" area changes to "Established".
7. Perform an echo test. Speak a word into the microphone of the mobile and check
that the word is returned to the loudspeaker of the mobile.
For further tests, you can create additional virtual subscriber profiles with different
call settings.
Upgrading an audio call to a video call
Initial situation: You have set up an audio call. The GUI shows the "IMS" tab of the
"Data Application Control" dialog.
1. Select the audio call entry in the "Events" area of the main view. The relevant entry
indicates the event and the status "Established".
2. Press the "Update Call" softkey.
A dialog box opens.
3. Change the "Call Type" to "Video".
4. Set the "Video Codec" compatible to your mobile.
5. Press the "Update" button.
6. Check the "Events" area of the main view. If the mobile accepts the modification,
the event changes to .
You can check the established video call also at your mobile.
Sending a short message (SMS) to the mobile
A dialog box opens.
2. Press the
button.
The mobile-terminating short message settings of the virtual subscriber are displayed.
3. Configure all settings:
a) Select the "Destination" to which the message shall be sent.
b) Select the "SMS Type".
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
28
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
c) Enter the message text.
4. Press the "Send" button.

The dialog box is closed and the message is sent to the mobile.
A new line is added to the "Events" area. After a successful message transfer, the
status in that line equals "OK".
5. Check the incoming message at the mobile.
For further tests, you can create additional virtual subscriber profiles with different
short message settings.
Sending a short message from the mobile to the DAU
1. Send a short message from your mobile to the DAU.
With the default virtual subscriber settings, you can send the message to any public user ID. It will be accepted by virtual subscriber 1 (public user ID "*").
2. Check the "Events" area of the main view.
After a successful message transfer, there is a new line with the event
status "OK".
and the
3. Select this line in the "Events" area.

The lower part of the main view displays details about the received message, for
example the message text.
Troubleshooting a failed registration
If your mobile registers to the radio access network, but not to the IMS, check the following settings.
1. Is the internal IMS server used and switched on?
a) Check the upper right corner of the "IMS" tab. It must state "intern IMS", not
"extern IMS".
To modify this setting, press the "Config" hotkey.
b) Check the "IMS Service" softkey. It must state "ON", not "OFF".
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
29
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload
2. Subscriber settings (hotkey "Subscriber"):

a) Is the private user ID correct?
If you are not sure which ID is used by your mobile, you can analyze SIP register messages sent by your mobile. The private user ID is contained in the
header as username="...".
b) Are the authentication settings correct?
If the mobile does not support or require authentication, set "No Authentication".
If the mobile requires authentication, select the AKA version and configure all
"Authentication Data" settings compatible to your mobile.
3. "P-CSCF" settings (hotkey "P-CSCF").
Search the tab containing the IP address to which the mobile sends the REGISTER message and check the settings:
a) The "Behavior" must be "Normal".
b) If the mobile suggests an expiration interval in its REGISTER message, check
"Registration" > "Expiration Time". The value suggested by the mobile must be
within the range "MIN" to "MAX".
3.6 Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload

You can use the ePDG service of the DAU for offload tests from LTE to WLAN and
back.
You need the WLAN signaling application to simulate a WLAN access point and the
LTE signaling application to simulate an LTE cell.
At the DAU, you typically need the IMS server, the DNS server and the ePDG service.
Option R&S CMW-KA065 is required for usage of the ePDG service.
Offload tests can also be performed with protocol test applications. They also use the
ePDG service of the DAU and require option R&S CMW-KA065. But protocol tests do
not use the graphical user interface of the DAU for ePDG configuration.
The following applies to tests with signaling applications, not to protocol tests.
General proceeding
Initially, both signaling applications are switched off. At the DUT, access to WLAN and
LTE networks is switched on.
1. If your DUT performs a DNS query to derive the IP address of the ePDG, prepare
the DNS service:
a) Create an entry with the ePDG domain used by the DUT and the IP address of
the internal ePDG. The ePDG IP address is configurable via the ePDG settings.
b) Switch on the DNS service.
2. Prepare the ePDG service:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
30
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Using the eMBMS Service
a) Configure the ePDG settings compatible to your DUT / SIM card.

b) Switch on the ePDG service.
3. Set up a voice over LTE/IMS call, for example a video call.
For details, see Chapter 3.5, "Using the IMS Server", on page 23.
4. To check the established connection, you can for example use the throughput
measurement of the DAU.
You can also use the IP analysis application of the DAU and check the view "Data
Pie Charts" for the used protocols ("Data per Protocol"). Most traffic should be
transported via RTP.
5. To trigger a mobile-initiated offload to WLAN, switch on the WLAN signaling application.
Note that the two signaling applications must use different TRX modules. Otherwise they cannot be active in parallel.
The TX power of the WLAN signaling application must be high, so that the DUT
can see the WLAN access point and prefers it to the LTE network.
6. Monitor the offloading. You can for example check the following:
The DUT lists the access point within its list of available WLAN access points.
In the WLAN signaling application main view, the connection state changes to
"Associated".
In the LTE signaling application main view, the list of established bearers is
reduced by one entry.
In the ePDG service main view, a new connection is listed.
7. You can again use the throughput measurement to check the active connection.
And you can use the IP analysis application and check the view "Data Pie Charts"
for the used protocols ("Data per Protocol"). Most traffic should be transported via
IPsec, no longer via RTP.
8. To hand over the connection back to LTE, reduce the TX power of the WLAN signaling application or switch it off.
9. Monitor the process. You can for example check the following:
The DUT lists the access point with very low power or not at all.
In the WLAN signaling application main view, the connection state changes to
"Idle".
In the LTE signaling application main view, a bearer is added to the list of
established bearers.
In the ePDG service main view, there is no established connection listed.
3.7 Using the eMBMS Service

The DAU option R&S CMW-KAA30 enables a mini service layer for eMBMS (evolved
multimedia broadcast multicast service). The multicast option R&S CMW-KA150 is
also required.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
31
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Using the eMBMS Service
The mini service layer of the DAU provides all eMBMS services required for eMBMS
tests. It supports for example the following features:
Unicast services:
Bootstrap function
Associated delivery procedures, for example file repair function and reception
reports
Multicast services
Service announcement over the FLUTE protocol
File download and video streaming over the FLUTE protocol
Replay of pcap files, that is replay of pre-recorded eMBMS multicast content

The IP replay application of the DAU is required (included in option R&S CMWKM050).
The eMBMS mini service layer does not provide a graphical user interface. It cannot be
configured directly via the DAU software.
Instead, it is configured and controlled comfortably via CMWcards or via protocol test
applications. Even the IP replay application is controlled in that way for eMBMS tests.
You do not need to configure it via the DAU software.
The following figure provides a graphical overview.
Figure 3-5: eMBMS service layer overview
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
32
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Using the Hard Disk of the DAU
3.8 Using the Hard Disk of the DAU

The internal hard disk of the DAU can be used for file sharing. It provides a samba
share for this purpose.
By default, the samba share is mapped to drive Z. You can access it via the Windows
Explorer, either locally or from another host connected to the CMW internal subnet.
The multimedia folder of the share can also be accessed via the WebDAV protocol,
see "Accessing the samba share via WebDAV" on page 34.
Figure 3-6: DAU samba share in Windows Explorer
To change the drive letter, use the hotkey "Network Drive Map" of the "Data Application Control" dialog.
The samba share provides the following directories:
dau_logging:
This folder contains log files for service purposes. They are intended for use by
Rohde & Schwarz only.
It also contains files with encryption keys for IPsec. You can enter these keys in a
network protocol analyzer, in order to analyze IP log files of encrypted connections,
see Chapter 3.11, "Configuring Wireshark for IPsec", on page 36.
dau_tools:
Contains tools which can be installed on the mobile for data testing. The tools are
also available on the web portal of the DAU.
ftp_anon:
Anonymous FTP users have write access to this directory (upload / delete). For the
other directories they have only read access (download).
ip_analysis:
This directory contains csv files created via the "Export DB" function of the "IP
Analysis" application, see "Export DB (hotkey)" on page 103.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
33
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Accessing the Built-in Web Server
ip_logging:
This directory contains log files created via the "IP Logging" application, see Chapter 4.2.7, "IP Logging Tab", on page 98. You may delete, copy or rename these
files.
ip_replay:
This directory is used by the "IP Replay" application, see Chapter 4.2.9, "IP Replay
Tab", on page 115. If you want to replay packet capture files, store them in this
directory.
multimedia:
When you add pages to the web portal of the DAU, the related files are stored in
directory multimedia/web_server/user/web_pages/.
rohde-schwarz:
This folder contains internal configuration files and is for use by Rohde & Schwarz
only.
User-specific applications are not supported

The DAU supports the embedded IP services only. Installation and execution of userspecific applications on the DAU are not supported.
If you need to use own IP services/applications, please install them on a separate host,
connect the host to the LAN DAU connector and configure the IP settings accordingly,
see Chapter 4.1.2, "IP Config Tab", on page 40.
Accessing the samba share via WebDAV
The multimedia folder of the samba share can also be accessed via the WebDAV
protocol (Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning). As address, enter the IP
address of the DAU, followed by /webshare, e.g. 172.22.1.201/webshare.
The HTTP service of the DAU must be running, see Chapter 4.1.5, "HTTP Tab",
on page 52.
3.9 Accessing the Built-in Web Server

The DAU is shipped with a built-in web server which runs a web portal. This portal can
be used to test web browsing with the mobile.
The following figure shows the main page of the web portal. This is the starting-point
for further information, statistics and tools useful for data application testing.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
34
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Accessing the Built-in Web Server
Figure 3-7: Web portal on the Data Application Unit
You can load the web pages using the "IP address" of the DAU shown in the "IP Config" tab. Type it into your Internet browser: http://<IP_address>, for example,
http://172.22.1.201. If you want to use domain names instead of IP addresses,
please configure and start the DNS server, see Chapter 4.1.3, "DNS Tab",
on page 46.
The built-in web portal on the DAU is based on a wiki solution. It is divided into two
parts:
"Main": This part is predefined by Rohde & Schwarz and provides the following:
"OMA XHTML Tests": set of XHTML tests specified by the Open Mobile Alliance
"DAU Services": overview of the states of the DAU services
"DAU Status": overview of the states of the DAU services and the state of the
DAU
"IP Configurations": examples and tools for configuring IPv6 connections
"Tools": programs which can be installed on the host behind the mobile for data
testing
For example, you can download the iperf remote configuration program which
is required on the mobile to perform iperf measurements. See also Chapter 3.10, "Configuring Iperf on the Mobile", on page 36.
The tools are also available on the samba share.
"DAU Help": The document you are currently reading. This help is a copy of the
help that is embedded in the "CMW" program.
"Toolbox": search function of the Wiki
"User": This part is empty by default. As usual for a wiki, you can add own web
pages to this part and modify them using the built-in editor.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
35
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Configuring Wireshark for IPsec
Note: When updating the data testing support package, the "User" pages may be
lost. Back up your files before updating the software. All "User" web files are stored
on the hard disk of the DAU in the directory multimedia/web_server/user/
web_pages/, see Figure 3-6.
3.10 Configuring Iperf on the Mobile

For an iperf measurement, the iperf tool must be running at both ends of a connection,
at the DAU side and at the mobile side.
To ensure compatibility to the iperf tool used by the DAU, use the iperf remote configuration program for Windows at the mobile side. You can download it from the tools section of the web portal or the samba share.
The following figure shows the user interface of the iperf remote configuration program.
Specify the properties of the server and client instances as necessary. The settings are
equal to the settings on the DAU, see Chapter 4.2.4, "IPerf Tab", on page 90.
Figure 3-8: Iperf remote configuration program for the mobile
During an iperf measurement, the tool at mobile side shows the IP performance of the
downlink, while the DAU shows the IP performance of the uplink.
3.11 Configuring Wireshark for IPsec

If a connection is encrypted via IPsec, log files of the connection can only be analyzed
if the used encryption keys are known.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
36
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
General Description
Configuring Wireshark for IPsec
Typically, you use the "IP logging" application of the DAU to create log files of a connection. And you use Wireshark to analyze the created pcap files.
If the connection is encrypted, you must provide the used encryption keys to Wireshark. For this purpose, the DAU stores the used encryption keys on the samba share.
Encrypted ePDG connections
To provide encryption keys for ePDG connections to Wireshark, proceed as follows.
1. Establish the ePDG connections.
2. Access the samba share of the DAU, folder dau_logging\logs\DAU.
3. Open the file epdg-esp_sa.
The file contains a list of encryption keys for the ESP protocol. It also indicates the
path of the file esp_sa in the Wireshark installation.
4. Copy the encryption keys to the file esp_sa.
5. Open the file epdg-ikev2_decryption_table.
The file contains a list of encryption keys for the IKEv2 protocol. It also indicates
the path of the file ikev2_decryption_table in the Wireshark installation.
6. Copy the encryption keys to the file ikev2_decryption_table.
7. (Re-)start Wireshark.
You can now use Wireshark to analyze log files of the ePDG connections.
For each new ePDG connection, new keys are generated. So you must repeat the
procedure for new connections.
Encrypted IMS connections
IMS connections can also be encrypted via IPsec. In that case, the same keys are
used for all connections - as long as you do not modify the related authentication settings. So you need to provide the encryption keys to Wireshark only once.
As for ePDG connections, the encryption keys are stored on the samba share in the
folder dau_logging\logs\DAU.
Copy the keys from the file ims-esp_sa to the file esp_sa of the Wireshark installation.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
37
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Data Application Control Dialog
4 GUI Reference
This section provides detailed reference information on the Graphical User Interface
(GUI) of the Data Application Unit (DAU).
The GUI of the DAU provides two main dialogs:
The "Data Application Control" dialog allows you to configure and control global
DAU IP services (e.g. FTP, HTTP) and to configure the IP network settings of the
DAU.
It can be opened from the "Setup" dialog of the instrument and from the "Data
Application Measurements" dialog.
The "Data Application Measurements" dialog allows you to configure and control IP
services dedicated to a specific IP connection (e.g. IPerf, network impairments).
The DAU measurements must be enabled in the "Measurement Controller" dialog
and can then be accessed via the task bar.
For details refer to the following sections.
Data Application Control Dialog.............................................................................. 38

Data Application Measurements............................................................................. 86
4.1 Data Application Control Dialog

The "Data Application Control" dialog allows you to configure the DAU services and the
IP network settings of the DAU.
Opening the "Data Application Control" dialog
1. Press "Setup" to open the "Setup" dialog.
2. In section "System" press the button "Go to config".
The "Data Application Control" dialog opens.
Alternatively, you can access the dialog from the "Data Application Measurements"
dialog, using the softkey "Configure Services".
The "Data Application Control" dialog contains an overview tab, a tab for configuration
of the IP settings and one tab per DAU service. Refer to the following sections for a
detailed description.
Overview Tab.......................................................................................................... 39
IP Config Tab.......................................................................................................... 40
DNS Tab................................................................................................................. 46
FTP Tab.................................................................................................................. 50
HTTP Tab................................................................................................................52
IMS Tab...................................................................................................................53
ePDG Tab............................................................................................................... 76
Common Softkeys, Hotkeys and Parameters......................................................... 85
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
38
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
4.1.1 Overview Tab

The tab provides an overview of the current IP settings and all DAU services, including
the state of each service.
Figure 4-1: Data Application Control - Overview tab
LAN DAU Status, Current DAU IPv4/IPv6 Settings...................................................... 39

DNS, FTP, HTTP, IMS, ePDG...................................................................................... 39
Service Control..............................................................................................................39
LAN DAU Status, Current DAU IPv4/IPv6 Settings
Display the most important elements of the current IP setup
For details and configuration see Chapter 4.1.2, "IP Config Tab", on page 40.
DNS, FTP, HTTP, IMS, ePDG
Shows the state of the corresponding service and the most important settings.
For details, refer to the following sections:
Chapter 4.1.3, "DNS Tab", on page 46
Chapter 4.1.4, "FTP Tab", on page 50
Chapter 4.1.5, "HTTP Tab", on page 52
Chapter 4.1.6, "IMS Tab", on page 53
Chapter 4.1.7, "ePDG Tab", on page 76
Service Control
To start or stop a service, select the corresponding softkey (e.g. "FTP Server") and
press ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP. Alternatively, right-click the softkey.
The current service state is indicated by the softkey, in the overview and in the title of
the corresponding tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
39
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
4.1.2 IP Config Tab

This tab specifies the IP settings for the DAU and the mobile. The settings must be
compatible to the test setup.
To apply changes of the IP settings and make them known to the signaling units, you
must "restart" the generation of downlink signals by the signaling units (switch downlink
signal generation off and on again in the signaling application or restart protocol tests).
You can specify IP settings both for IPv4 and for IPv6. Which IP version is used
depends on the mobile and the used signaling application or protocol test application. It
is not selected by the DAU. To use IPv4 you need R&S CMW-KA100. IPv6 requires
additionally option R&S CMW-KA150.
You can configure the DAU IP settings manually or via the "Initial Setup Wizard". For
an introduction to both methods and background information concerning IPv4 and
IPv6, see Chapter 3.2, "Adapting the DAU IP Configuration", on page 16. For a setup
with a connected external network you may want to contact the network administrator
prior to configuration of the IP settings.
The following sections describe the information displayed in the "IP Config" tab and the
related configuration dialogs.
4.1.2.1
Displayed Information............................................................................................. 40
General Configuration.............................................................................................42
IPv4 Configuration...................................................................................................42
IPv6 Configuration...................................................................................................44
Displayed Information
The "IP Config" tab displays the current IP configuration of the DAU.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
40
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-2: Data Application Control - IP Config tab
The parameter "LAN DAU Status" at the top of the tab indicates the state of the LAN
DAU connector at the rear panel, i.e. whether an active external network is connected
or not. Note that an external network connected to the LAN DAU connector is ignored
by the DAU if a standalone setup is selected in the settings, see "IPv4 Address Configuration" on page 43 and "LAN IPv6 Address Configuration" on page 45.
The current IPv4 configuration and the general IP settings are displayed in the left half
of the tab, the IPv6 configuration in the right half. The values result either directly from
DAU settings described in the following sections or have been assigned dynamically by
a connected external network.
The current DAU IP addresses displayed at the top can be used to address the DAU,
e.g. to access the internal web server or other DAU services.
If the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is selected as configuration
method, an additional parameter "DHCPv4 Status" or "DHCPv6 Status" is shown. This
parameter indicates via a colored icon whether the dynamic configuration via DHCP
was successful and the network connection works properly (green icon) or not (yellow
icon).
Related commands
The following commands allow you to query the displayed addresses and prefixes.
For the mobile address/prefix pools there is a separate command for each configuration method. So all pools can be queried, the displayed currently used pools as well as
the currently inactive pools.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:IPADdress?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:SMASk?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:GIP?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
41
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:DHCP:ADDResses:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:AUTomatic:ADDResses:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:IPADdress?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:DROuter?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:DHCP:PREFixes:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:AUTomatic:PREFixes:CATalog?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:CATalog?
4.1.2.2
General Configuration
To modify the general configuration, press the "Config" hotkey. The general settings
are located at the top of the dialog box.
Figure 4-3: General IP configuration
Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)

Specifies the maximum IP packet size that can be transmitted without fragmentation.
IPv6 requires an MTU of at least 1280 bytes. IPv4 is possible with any configurable
value.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:MTU
4.1.2.3
IPv4 Configuration
To modify the IPv4 configuration press the "Config" hotkey and select the tab "IPv4
Address Configuration".
The available settings are described below. For additional information see Chapter 3.2.2, "IP Address Configuration Methods", on page 18.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
42
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-4: IPv4 address configuration
IPv4 Address Configuration.......................................................................................... 43

Static IP config.............................................................................................................. 43
IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask............................................................................43
Gateway IP..................................................................................................... 44
Mobile IPv4 Address Pool...............................................................................44
IPv4 Address Configuration
Selects the method to be used for IPv4 address configuration.
The following methods are available:
"Automatic R&S CMW500 Network (standalone)"
Select this value for a standalone test setup. As a consequence the predefined
automatic IP configuration is used.
"Static IP config"
Select this value for a test setup with connected external network and static IP
addresses.
For configuration of the static IP configuration, see "Static IP config" on page 43.
"DHCPv4 from LAN (LAN DAU)"
Select this value for a test setup with connected external network and dynamic IP
address assignment via DHCPv4.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:ADDRess:TYPE
Static IP config
The following parameters specify the static IP configuration to be used if "Static IP config" is selected for IPv4 Address Configuration.
IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask Static IP config
Assign a static IPv4 address and subnet mask to the LAN DAU Ethernet adapter.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:IPADdress
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:SMASk
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
43
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Gateway IP Static IP config

If you want to test public services on the Internet, specify the IP address of the gateway connecting the external network to the Internet.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:GIP
Mobile IPv4 Address Pool Static IP config
Specifies the IP address pool for mobiles. An address is assigned to the mobile upon
request. A single mobile may request several addresses and thus need several entries.
Configuring entries:
Edit existing entries directly in the dialog.
To add an entry to the end of the list, press the "Add Address" button, then edit the
new entry.
To delete a specific entry, select the number of the entry via parameter "Idx:" and
press the "Remove Index" button.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:DELete
4.1.2.4
IPv6 Configuration
To modify the IPv6 configuration press the "Config" hotkey and select the tab "IPv6
Address Configuration".
The available settings are described below. For additional information see Chapter 3.2.2, "IP Address Configuration Methods", on page 18.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
44
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-5: IPv6 address configuration
LAN IPv6 Address Configuration.................................................................................. 45

Mobile IPv6 Prefix Configuration...................................................................................46
Routing..........................................................................................................................46
LAN IPv6 Address Configuration
"Type" selects the method to be used for IPv6 DAU address configuration.
The following methods are available:
"Automatic R&S CMW500 Network (standalone)"
Select this value for a standalone test setup. As a consequence the predefined
automatic IP configuration is used. Both the DAU address and the mobile prefixes
are configured automatically. No further IP configuration is necessary for IPv6.
"Static IP config"
Select this value for a test setup with connected external network and static IP
addresses.
Specify the static IP addresses of the DAU and a default router belonging to the
same subnet via parameter "Static Configuration". The DAU sends packets with
unknown IPv6 prefix to this default router.
"Autoconfiguration (RA, DHCPv6)"
Select this value for a test setup with connected external network and dynamic
autoconfiguration. IPv6 autoconfiguration uses Router Advertisements (RA) and/or
DHCPv6.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:ADDRess
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:DROuter
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
45
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Mobile IPv6 Prefix Configuration

This section is only relevant for test setups with connected external network. It is
ignored for a standalone test setup (LAN IPv6 Address Configuration > Type = Automatic R&S CMW500 Network (standalone)).
The following methods can be selected for definition of the IPv6 prefix pool for mobiles:
"Static IP config"
Select this value to use a statically defined pool of prefixes. Specify the prefix pool
via parameter "Static Configuration". Only 64-bit prefixes are supported.
The pool can be modified in the same way as the address pool for IPv4, see
"Mobile IPv4 Address Pool" on page 44.
"DHCP Prefix Delegation"
Select this value to configure the prefix pool dynamically using DHCPv6 prefix delegation.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MOBile:PREFix:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:DELete
Routing
Allows you to configure manual routes for packets sent by the mobile. For destination
addresses belonging to the subnet of the DAU or reachable via the default router, you
do not need to configure routes.
For other destinations, specify the prefix of the destination subnet and the IPv6
address of the router to be used. The router must belong to the subnet of the DAU.
"Routing Protocols" are not supported in the current software version.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ROUTing:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:DELete
4.1.3 DNS Tab

This tab specifies the primary and secondary DNS server addresses to be sent to the
mobile. It also configures and controls the local DNS server of the DAU.
Basically, the mobile can send DNS queries to a foreign DNS server located in a connected external network or to the local DNS server reachable via the DAU address.
The DAU handles the queries as follows:
DNS queries from a mobile to a foreign/external DNS server are forwarded by the
DAU like any other IP packets with a foreign destination address. The DAU does
not recognize them as DNS queries.
DNS queries addressed to the DAU are handled by the local DNS server of the
DAU. Optionally, the DAU can forward a query to a foreign DNS server if the local
DNS server database does not contain a matching entry.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
46
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
DNS queries of type A, AAAA and SRV are supported. The DAU measurement
"DNS Requests" allows you to monitor all DNS queries addressed to the DAU, see
Chapter 4.2.6, "DNS Requests Tab", on page 96.
The DNS tab displays a summary of the DAU settings related to the DNS service.
Figure 4-6: Data Application Control - DNS tab
To open the configuration dialog, press the "Config" hotkey.
Figure 4-7: Data Application Control - DNS Server Configuration dialog
The settings are described below.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
47
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
DNS Server Info for the mobile..................................................................................... 48

Foreign DNS server...................................................................................................... 49
Internal DNS entries......................................................................................................49
Application Services......................................................................................................49
Test Primary Foreign DNS Server (softkey)..................................................................50
DNS Server Control...................................................................................................... 50
DNS Server Info for the mobile
The "Type" determines which addresses are sent to the mobile as primary and secondary DNS server address and how a DNS query addressed to the DAU is handled.
Note that a foreign DNS server cannot be used with a standalone setup.
Available types:
"No DNS"
No DNS server address is sent to the mobile.
"Internal"
The address of the DAU is sent to the mobile as DNS server address.
DNS queries addressed to the DAU are handled by the local DNS server of the
DAU. The foreign DNS server settings are ignored.
If the local DNS server is not running, a DNS query fails.
"Internal and Foreign"
The address of the DAU is sent to the mobile as DNS server address.
DNS queries addressed to the DAU are handled by the local DNS server. If the
local DNS server database does not contain a matching entry, the query is forwarded to the configured foreign DNS server.
If the local DNS server is not running, the foreign DNS server settings are ignored
and a DNS query fails.
"Foreign"
The configured foreign DNS server address is sent to the mobile.
The state and database of the local DNS server are irrelevant.
The "DNS Server Info for the mobile" displayed at the top of the DNS tab indicates
which of the listed types is currently active and which addresses are sent to the mobile.
A displayed address can be:
the current IP address of the DAU, providing access to the local DNS server
the statically configured foreign DNS server address
a foreign DNS server address received via DHCP, overriding the configured
address
The DAU sends DNS server addresses to the mobile via a signaling message, for
example via an ACTIVATE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:PRIMary:STYPe
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:SECondary:STYPe
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess?
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
48
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Foreign DNS server

Specifies the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of the foreign primary and secondary DNS
servers.
If a DNS server address is received via DHCP it can either be ignored or used instead
of the statically configured address. This is configurable separately for all four
addresses.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:UDHCp
Internal DNS entries
Configures local DNS server database entries assigning an IPv4 or IPv6 address to a
domain. The resulting DNS records are of type A for IPv4 and of type AAAA (quad-A)
for IPv6.
Each entry consists of a domain and one IP address. To assign both an IPv4 and an
IPv6 address to the same domain, create two entries.
A type A or type AAAA DNS query contains the domain. The answer of the DNS server
contains all IPv4 addresses or all IPv6 addresses assigned to the domain.
To add an entry to the end of the list, press the "Add DNS entry" button, then edit
the new entry.
press the "Remove index" button.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:DELete
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:CATalog?
Application Services
Configures local DNS server database entries assigning a host to a particular service.
The resulting DNS records are of type SRV (see RFC 2782).
Each entry consists of the service, the domain supporting the service, the protocol
(UDP or TCP) and the port used for the service.
A type SRV DNS query contains the service and the protocol. The answer of the DNS
server contains all domain/port combinations supporting the service via the requested
protocol.
To add an entry to the end of the list, press the "Add applic." button, then edit the
new entry.
press the "Remove index" button.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
49
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:DELete
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:CATalog?
Test Primary Foreign DNS Server (softkey)
The softkey opens a dialog that allows to test whether the primary foreign DNS server
is reachable and whether it returns IP addresses for a specific domain.
Figure 4-8: Connection test dialog
The test uses the primary DNS server addresses resulting from section Foreign DNS
server (statically defined addresses or DHCP override values).
To perform a test, enter the domain to be resolved and press the "Start Test" button.
During a test the DAU sends a ping request to the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of the foreign DNS server to test whether it is reachable. The result is displayed in the dialog in
column "Server available".
If the server is reachable, the DAU sends DNS queries of type A and type AAAA to the
IPv4 and to the IPv6 address of the foreign DNS server, four queries in total. The
results are shown in the dialog. The "A/AAAA Resource Record" columns indicate
whether the server has returned an IP address (yellow dash = no result, red cross =
failure, green checkmark = success).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:DOMain
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:STARt
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:RESults?
DNS Server Control
Start or stop the internal DNS server using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys.
Alternatively, right-click the "Local DNS Server" softkey.
The softkey shows the current state.
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:STATe
4.1.4 FTP Tab

Configures the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) service for file transfer between the mobile
and the DAU.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
50
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
With service type "FTP Server", FTP users can access the samba share of the DAU.
Anonymous FTP users can download data from the samba share and have full access
rights for the subdirectory ftp_anon (delete, download, upload). The access rights of
registered users are configurable per user.
See also Chapter 3.8, "Using the Hard Disk of the DAU", on page 33.
Figure 4-9: Data Application Control - FTP tab
FTP Service Type......................................................................................................... 51

FTP Server Settings......................................................................................................51
FTP User Accounts.........................................................................................52
Service Control..............................................................................................................52
FTP Service Type
Selects the FTP service type.
"FTP Server"
An FTP server runs on the R&S CMW. You can configure it via the
"FTP Server Settings".
"FTP Traffic
Generator"
The R&S CMW acts as a traffic generator which creates dummy data.
You can download dummy data to the mobile or upload files from the
mobile to the instrument. Note that uploaded files are actually not
stored. When running long-term tests this avoids the risk of running
out of data or filling up the internal disk drive of the DAU.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STYPe
FTP Server Settings
Configure the FTP server via the checkboxes.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:ENConnection
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:IPVSix
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
51
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:AUSer
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:DUPLoad
FTP User Accounts FTP Server Settings
Use the "... user account" softkeys to configure the FTP user accounts. For each user,
you can specify the user credentials and access rights for data upload, download and
deletion.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:CATalog?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:DELete
Service Control
Start or stop the service using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively,
right-click the "FTP Service" softkey.
The softkey shows the current service state.
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STATe
4.1.5 HTTP Tab

Configures the Hypertext Transport Protocol (HTTP) service for access to the embedded web server.
Figure 4-10: Data Application Control - HTTP tab
Hypertext Transfer Protocol.......................................................................................... 52

Service Control..............................................................................................................52
Hypertext Transfer Protocol
You can allow or deny HTTP connections to the web server from the external network
(company LAN), and switch on/off IPv6 support.
Access to the web server from the mobile or from a host connected to the internal
CMW subnet is always allowed.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:ENConnection
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:IPVSix
Service Control
right-click the "HTTP Service" softkey.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
52
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference

Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:STATe
4.1.6 IMS Tab

This tab configures and controls the internal IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) server
provided by the DAU (option R&S CMW-KAA20 required).
The IMS server allows an IMS client on the mobile to register to the IMS domain. With
a registered mobile, you can test voice over IMS and SMS over IMS. For step-by-step
instructions, see Chapter 3.5, "Using the IMS Server", on page 23.
If the internal IMS server is used, the IMS tab shows a log of general IMS information
and an event log of calls and short message transfers. The lower part shows details for
the currently selected line of the event log.
Figure 4-11: IMS tab, internal IMS server
If an external IMS network is used instead of the internal IMS server, only the address
of the external P-CSCF is configured at the DAU. In that case, IMS services are transparent to the DAU. Besides the P-CSCF address, the DAU has no information about
the IMS network. It does not even know whether the mobile has registered or not.
The DAU sends the P-CSCF address to the mobile via a signaling message, for example via an ACTIVATE PDP CONTEXT ACCEPT message.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
53
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-12: IMS tab, external IMS network
While usage of the internal IMS server requires option R&S CMW-KAA20, usage of an
external IMS server is possible without this option.
The main view areas, the softkeys and the IMS server settings are described in detail
in the following sections.
4.1.6.1
IMS Server Control and Softkeys............................................................................54

General IMS Info..................................................................................................... 55
Event Log................................................................................................................56
Event Details...........................................................................................................56
General IMS Settings.............................................................................................. 57
P-CSCF Settings.....................................................................................................58
Subscriber Settings................................................................................................. 61
Virtual Subscriber Settings......................................................................................64
Mobile-Terminating Calls........................................................................................ 72
Short Messages...................................................................................................... 75
IMS Server Control and Softkeys

The IMS server must be running before the mobile can register and any IMS services
can be used.
Server Control
To start or stop the IMS server, press the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP key. Alternatively, right-click the "IMS Service" softkey.
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:STATe
Establishing a call / sending a short message
For step-by-step instructions, see Chapter 3.5, "Using the IMS Server", on page 23.
Update Call (softkey)
This softkey is active if you have selected an established call in the "Events" area.
The softkey opens a dialog box where you can modify call settings. You can for example re-configure the supported codec rates or change the call type.
Thus you can modify the properties of an established call. You can for example
upgrade an audio call to a video call, without releasing the call and setting up a new
call.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
54
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:ALIGnment
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:CODec
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:ATTRibutes
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:PERForm
Release Call (softkey)
This softkey is active if at least one call is established.
The softkey opens a dialog box where you can select the calls to be released.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:LIST?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID
Deregister Mobile (softkey)
This softkey is active if at least one mobile has registered.
The softkey opens a dialog box where you can select the mobiles to be deregistered.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:DERegister
4.1.6.2
General IMS Info

The "General IMS Info" area in the main view reports events and errors like IMS state
changes, registration events and subscription events.
Figure 4-13: General IMS info area of the IMS tab
Entries
Each entry consists of a timestamp, an icon indicating the category of the event and a
short text describing the event.
Meaning of the category icons:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
= information, warning and error
55
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:GINFo?
4.1.6.3
Event Log
A new line is added to the top of the "Events" area whenever a new call is set up or a
short message is sent or received.
When a call state changes, the corresponding line is updated.
Figure 4-14: Events area of the IMS tab
To clear the area, switch the IMS server off and on again. To view details for a call or a
message, select the line and check the lower part of the main view, see Chapter 4.1.6.4, "Event Details", on page 56.
Entries
Each line in the "Events" area provides the following information:
Timestamp: Time when the current status was reached.
Source: Calling party / message sender
Destination: Called party / message recipient
"VSn": Virtual subscriber number n
"Sn": Subscriber number n
Event: Indicates the type of the event.
established audio call
established video call
call setup or released call
sent or received short message

Status: Status of the call / message, for example:
"In Progress": Call setup in progress
"Ringing": Mobile ringing during mobile-terminating call setup
"Media Update": Codec negotiation done
"Established": Call established
"Released": Call released
"OK": Short message received or sent, no problems detected
"Not OK": Short message received or sent, problems detected
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EVENts?
4.1.6.4
Event Details
The lower part of the main view shows detailed information for the currently selected
entry of the "Events" area.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
56
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
For a call, the information covers the entire history from the call setup to the current
state. Each status change is listed with its timestamp. Important call settings are also
listed.
The ID shown at the top is an automatically generated unique ID, identifying the event
in the DAU.
Figure 4-15: Event details for an established audio call
For a short message, important message properties and the message text are listed.
Figure 4-16: Event details for a sent short message
Query of event details

Use the following command.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:HISTory?
4.1.6.5
General IMS Settings

Press the "Config" hotkey to open the "IMS Server Configuration" dialog box.
It configures general IMS server settings. Additional settings can be accessed via the
other hotkeys.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
57
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-17: General IMS server settings
Use IMS Server as

Selects whether the internal IMS server of the DAU or an external IMS network shall
be used for IMS services.
For usage of an external IMS server, only the "External" settings in this dialog box are
relevant. For the internal IMS server, the "Internal" settings in this dialog box and all
other settings of the "IMS" tab are relevant.
Usage of the internal IMS server requires option R&S CMW-KAA20.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage
Transport Selection, UDP/TCP Threshold
Configures whether TCP or UDP is used by the internal IMS server.
"Default"
The threshold is fixed and equals 1300 characters per SIP message.
For shorter SIP messages, UDP is used. For longer SIP messages,
TCP is used.
"TCP Only"
TCP is always used, independent of the message length.
"UDP Only"
UDP is always used, independent of the message length.
"Custom"
The threshold is configurable via the setting "UDP/TCP Threshold"

(number of characters per SIP message). For shorter SIP messages,
UDP is used. For longer SIP messages, TCP is used.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:SELection
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:THReshold:VALue
P-CSCF IPv4/IPv6 Address
Configures the IPv4 and IPv6 address of an external P-CSCF.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVFour
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVSix
4.1.6.6
P-CSCF Settings
Press the "P-CSCF" hotkey to open the "P-CSCF Configuration" dialog box.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
58
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
It configures the P-CSCFs simulated by the internal IMS server.

You can create up to 10 P-CSCF profiles with different IP addresses and properties.
Each profile is displayed on a separate tab.
Profile 1 and 2 are always available. To create profile 3 to 10, option R&S CMWKAA21 is required.
Figure 4-18: P-CSCF settings
A list of all P-CSCFs is sent to the mobile. The mobile selects a P-CSCF from the list
for registration.
A possible use case is to configure P-CSCF 1 and 2 so that they reject the registration
and P-CSCF 3 and 4 so that they accept the registration. Then check whether the
mobile retries registration with another P-CSCF.
The settings are explained in the following.
Add / Delete Tab........................................................................................................... 59
IP Address.....................................................................................................................59
Behavior........................................................................................................................ 60
Failure........................................................................................................................... 60
Registration................................................................................................................... 60
Subscription.................................................................................................................. 60
OK (button)....................................................................................................................60
Add / Delete Tab
creates a new tab / P-CSCF. The maximum number of tabs is ten.
deletes the currently selected tab. Tab 1 and 2 cannot be deleted.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:DELete
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CATalog?
IP Address
Defines the IP address of the P-CSCF. You can specify an IPv4 or an IPv6 address.
Assign a different address to each profile.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
59
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The addresses of profile 1 and 2 are fixed. Profile 1 uses the IPv4 address of the DAU,
profile 2 the IPv6 address.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:IPADdress
Behavior
Defines the behavior of the P-CSCF when it receives a SIP message from the mobile.
"Normal"
Normal call flow, for example perform registration when REGISTER

message is received
"Failure"
Return the configured failure code
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:BEHaviour
Failure
Selects a failure code to be returned to the mobile for "Behavior" = "Failure".
Some failure messages support the header field "Retry After". It is filled with the configured time.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:FAILurecode
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:RETRyafter
Registration
Defines a minimum, maximum and default value for the registration expiration time
(duration of the registration).
The values are used as follows:
If the mobile does not include an expiration interval in its REGISTER message, the
configured "Default" value is used as expiration time for the registration.
If the mobile suggests an expiration interval in its REGISTER message:
If the suggested value is between the configured "Min" and "Max" value, the
suggested value is used as expiration time.
If the suggested value is outside of the configured "Min" / "Max" range, the registration is rejected.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:REGexp
Subscription
Defines a minimum, maximum and default value for the subscription expiration time.
The logic is the same as for "Registration", with SUBSCRIBE messages instead of
REGISTER messages.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:SUBexp
OK (button)
When you press the OK button, the internal list of P-CSCF profiles is updated according to your changes.
For remote control, this action must be explicitly triggered via a command.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
60
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CREate
4.1.6.7
Subscriber Settings
Press the "Subscriber" hotkey to open the "Subscribers Configuration" dialog box.
It configures profiles for tested mobiles.
You can create up to 5 subscriber profiles with different private user IDs and properties. Each profile is displayed on a separate tab. Profile 1 is always available.
Figure 4-19: Subscriber settings
A profile is selected automatically when a SIP message from the mobile is received.
The user ID included in the SIP message is compared to the user IDs in the profiles.
Depending on the message type, the mobile sends a public user ID or a private user
ID. A profile contains one private user ID and up to ten public user IDs.
If you have several mobiles with the same test SIM card, you can use the same subscriber profile for all these mobiles.
The settings are explained in the following.
Add / Delete Tab........................................................................................................... 62
Private User ID..............................................................................................................62
Authentication............................................................................................................... 62
Key Generation Algorithm............................................................................................. 62
Key................................................................................................................................ 63
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
61
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
AMF...............................................................................................................................63
OPc............................................................................................................................... 63
RES Length...................................................................................................................63
IPSec.............................................................................................................................63
Integrity Algorithm......................................................................................................... 63
Encryption Algorithm..................................................................................................... 64
Public User IDs............................................................................................................. 64
OK (button)....................................................................................................................64
Add / Delete Tab
creates a new tab / subscriber. The maximum number of tabs is five.
deletes the currently selected tab. Tab 1 cannot be deleted.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:DELete
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CATalog?
Private User ID
Specifies the private User ID as stored on the ISIM or in the mobile.
If you are not sure which ID is used by your mobile, you can analyze SIP register messages sent by your mobile. The private user ID is contained in the header as username="...".
If the private user ID of the mobile is not assigned to any subscriber profile, authentication will fail.
Each subscriber profile must have a different private user ID.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PRIVateid
Authentication
Specifies whether authentication is performed during the registration procedure and
selects the authentication and key agreement (AKA) version to be used (see RFC
3310 and RFC 4169).
If authentication is enabled, the settings in section "Authentication Data" must be compatible to the mobile. And the authentication and key agreement version must be supported by the mobile. Otherwise registration will fail.
Authentication may require a test ISIM. An appropriate ISIM can be obtained from
Rohde & Schwarz (R&S CMW-Z04, stock no. 1207.9901.02). The default settings are
compatible to this ISIM.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:SCHeme
Key Generation Algorithm
Specifies which algorithm set is used by the ISIM: MILENAGE algorithms (see 3GPP
TS 35.205) or XOR algorithms.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
62
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:ALGorithm
Key
The authentication key K is used for the authentication procedure (including a possible
integrity check). The value is entered as 32-digit hexadecimal number.
The key K must be equal to the value stored on the test ISIM or the mobile. Otherwise
authentication fails.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:KEY
AMF
Specifies the Authentication Management Field (AMF) to be used for the authentication
procedure. The value is entered as 4-digit hexadecimal number.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:AMF
OPc
The key OPc is used for authentication and integrity check procedures with the MILENAGE algorithm set. If you use this algorithm set, specify the OPc used by the ISIM.
The value is entered as 32-digit hexadecimal number.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:OPC
RES Length
Specifies the length of the authentication response in bits. The calculated response is
truncated to the specified length before it is sent to the mobile.
Some mobiles require a specific response length.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:RESLength
IPSec
Specifies whether the IMS server supports IP security mechanisms.
If IPsec is supported by the IMS server but not by the mobile, the session is not rejected. It is established without IPsec.
To use Wireshark for connections with IPsec, see Chapter 3.11, "Configuring Wireshark for IPsec", on page 36.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ENABle
Integrity Algorithm
Selects an algorithm for integrity protection via IPsec. The supported algorithms are
HMAC-MD5-96 (see RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1-96 (see RFC 2404).
Configure this setting compatible to your mobile.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
63
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:
INTegrity
Encryption Algorithm
Selects an algorithm for encryption via IPsec. The supported algorithms are DESEDE3-CBC (see RFC 2451) and AES-CBC (see RFC 3602). NO_CIPH means no
encryption/ciphering.
Configure this setting compatible to your mobile.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:
ENCRyption
Public User IDs
If the mobile sends a public user ID that is not assigned to any subscriber profile, the
first profile is used. So for tests with this profile, you do not need to enter public user
IDs.
To use another profile, enter all public user IDs stored on the ISIM or in the mobile. Do
not assign the same user ID to several profiles.
A 4-digit number is automatically assigned to each profile.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PUBLicuserid<Index>
OK (button)
When you press the OK button, the internal list of subscriber profiles is updated
according to your changes.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CREate
4.1.6.8
Virtual Subscriber Settings

Press the "Virtual Subscriber" hotkey to open the "Virtual Subscribers Configuration"
dialog box.
The dialog box configures profiles of virtual subscribers. A virtual subscriber can call
the tested mobile and it can be called from the tested mobile.
You can create up to 20 virtual subscriber profiles with different properties. Each profile
is displayed on a separate tab. Profile 1 is always available.
The dialog box provides several views. You can switch between these views via buttons. This section describes the view shown in the following figure. If you see a different view, press the button "Configure Virtual Subscriber" to access this view.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
64
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-20: Virtual subscriber settings
Add / Delete Tab........................................................................................................... 66

Public User ID............................................................................................................... 66
Behavior........................................................................................................................ 66
Signaling Type.............................................................................................................. 66
Dedicated Bearer.......................................................................................................... 67
Audio............................................................................................................................. 67
Codec..............................................................................................................67
AMR................................................................................................................ 67
AMR Alignment Mode...........................................................................68
Codec Rates......................................................................................... 68
EVS.................................................................................................................68
Start Mode............................................................................................ 68
AMR-WB-IO Codec Rates.................................................................... 68
Bandwidth/Bit-Rate Ranges..................................................................68
Bandwidth............................................................................................. 69
Bit Rate................................................................................................. 69
HF Only.................................................................................................69
DTX.......................................................................................................69
DTX Recv............................................................................................. 69
CMR......................................................................................................69
Video............................................................................................................................. 70
Media Endpoint............................................................................................................. 70
Forward......................................................................................................................... 70
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
65
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
IP.....................................................................................................................70
RTP Port......................................................................................................... 70
Cmd Port.........................................................................................................71
AMR Alignment............................................................................................... 71
Audioboard....................................................................................................................71
Enable DTX in DL........................................................................................... 71
Force Mode.....................................................................................................71
(button)................................................................................................................... 71
(button)................................................................................................................... 72
OK (button)....................................................................................................................72
Add / Delete Tab
creates a new tab / virtual subscriber. The maximum number of tabs is twenty.
deletes the currently selected tab. Tab 1 cannot be deleted.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:ADD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:DELete
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CATalog?
Public User ID
For incoming mobile-originating calls, the called virtual subscriber is selected via its
public user ID.
By default, the first virtual subscriber profile has a wildcard "*" as ID. Any incoming
calls, for which no profile with a matching public user ID is found, are routed to this virtual subscriber. If you want to use this mechanism, do not modify the ID.
For additional virtual subscribers, define a different public user ID for each profile.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:ID
Behavior
Defines how the virtual subscriber reacts to a call from the tested mobile.
"Answer"
Answer the call
"NoAnswer"
Ignore the call and keep "ringing"
"Declined"
Reject the call
"Busy Here"
Virtual subscriber is busy
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEHaviour
Signaling Type
Specifies whether a voice call session is established with or without quality of service
preconditions. For a call with preconditions, a certain quality of service is ensured by
reserving network resources before alerting the called user. SIP preconditions are
defined in RFC 3312 and RFC 4032. See also 3GPP TS 24.229.
"Preconditions" SIP signaling as for a call with preconditions
"Without Preconditions"
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
SIP signaling as for a call without preconditions
66
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"Simple"
Simplified call flow, without preconditions and without 100rel
"Require
100rel"
SIP signaling as for a call without preconditions

The INVITE message contains a "Require" header field with the
option tag "100rel".
"Require Precondition"
SIP signaling as for a call with preconditions

The INVITE message contains a "Require" header field with the
option tag "precondition".
"Without Preconditions,
With 183"
SIP signaling as for a call without preconditions, with "183 Session in

Progress" message
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:SIGNalingtyp
Dedicated Bearer
Enables the automatic setup of a dedicated bearer, if a VoIMS connection is established. If the checkbox is disabled, the IMS server does not set up dedicated bearers
for calls to/from this virtual subscriber.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEARer
Audio
This node configures the codec to be used for audio calls.
Codec Audio
Selects the voice codec type to be used.
To use the EVS codec with the audio board, option R&S CMW-KS104 is required.
"AMR"
Narrowband adaptive multi-rate (AMR) codec
"AMR-WB"
Wideband adaptive multi-rate (AMR) codec
"EVS"
Enhanced voice services (EVS) codec
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:TYPE
AMR Audio
This node configures the wideband and narrowband AMR codec.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
67
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
AMR Alignment Mode AMR Audio

Selects the payload format.
"Octet Aligned" All payload fields are aligned to octet boundaries.
"Bandwidth
Efficient"
Only the full payload is octet aligned. Fewer padding bits are needed.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:ALIGnment
Codec Rates AMR Audio
Selects the supported AMR codec rates. For the wideband AMR, there are 9 codec
rates (index 0 to 8). For the narrowband AMR, there are 8 codec rates (index 0 to 7).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:
ENABle
EVS Audio
This node configures the EVS codec.
Start Mode EVS Audio

Selects the start mode for the EVS codec. The mode can change during the session.
There is a primary mode and an interoperable (IO) mode, compatible with AMR-WB.
AMR-WB-IO Codec Rates EVS Audio
Selects the codec rates supported for the AMR-WB IO mode.
Bandwidth/Bit-Rate Ranges EVS Audio
Selects a configuration mode for the bandwidth and bit-rate settings of the EVS primary mode.
"Common"
The same settings apply to the downlink (sending) and the uplink
(receiving). A node "Common" is displayed for configuration of the
settings.
"Send/
Receive"
There are separate settings for the downlink and the uplink. The
nodes "Send (DL)" and "Receive (UL)" are displayed for configuration
of the settings.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
68
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Bandwidth EVS Audio

Selects the codec bandwidths supported for the EVS primary mode:
Narrowband only (NB)
Wideband only (WB)
Super wideband only (SWB)
Fullband only (FB)
Narrowband and wideband (NB-WB)
Narrowband, wideband and super wideband (NB-SWB)
Narrowband, wideband, super wideband and fullband (NB-FB)
Bit Rate EVS Audio
Selects the supported bit-rate range for the EVS primary mode. The offered values
depend on the selected bandwidth.
HF Only EVS Audio
Specifies the SDP parameter "hf-only". It indicates the allowed header format.
The SDP parameters are defined in 3GPP TS 26.445.
"Both"
The "Compact" format and the "Header-Full" format are allowed

(value 0).
"Header Full
Only"
Only the "Header-Full" format is allowed (value 1).
"Not Present"
The SDP parameter is not present (no value). This must have the
same effect as the value 0.
DTX EVS Audio

Specifies the SDP parameter "dtx". It enables or disables DTX for the send direction
and the receive direction.
"Disable"
DTX is disabled (value 0).
"Enable"
DTX is enabled (value 1).
"Not Present"
DTX Recv EVS Audio

Specifies the SDP parameter "dtx-recv". It enables or disables DTX for the send direction of the receiver of the parameter.
"Disable"
DTX is disabled (value 0).
"Enable"
DTX is enabled (value 1).
"Not Present"
CMR EVS Audio

Specifies the SDP parameter "cmr". It enables or disables codec mode requests.
"Disable"
Codec mode requests are disabled (value -1).
"Enable"
Codec mode requests are enabled (value 0).
"Present All"
A codec mode request must be present in each packet (value 1).
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
69
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"Not Present"
Video
Selects the video codec to be used for video calls to the tested mobile.
You can also specify codec attributes.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:CODec
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:ATTRibutes
Media Endpoint
Configures the routing of an audio signal or video signal received from the mobile. The
setting applies to incoming and outgoing calls.
"Loopback"
The signal from the mobile is routed back immediately. A word spoken into the microphone of the mobile is returned to the loudspeaker
of the mobile.
"Forward"
The RTP packets from the mobile are forwarded to an external media
endpoint from Rohde & Schwarz. The packets returned by the media
endpoint are forwarded to the mobile. This method can be used to
implement an alternative loopback mechanism.
The RTCP packets are not forwarded. They are looped back by the
IMS server.
Packet forwarding is not supported for EVS audio codecs.
"Audioboard"
The signal from the mobile is routed to the speech decoder of the
audio board. The signal returned by the speech encoder of the audio
board is forwarded to the mobile.
Select this value to perform audio measurements for voice over IMS.
The audio board is provided by R&S CMW-B400B, the speech codec
by R&S CMW-B405A.
To use the EVS codec with the audio board, option R&S CMWKS104 is required.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MEDiaendpoin
Forward
Specifies settings for Media Endpoint = "Forward":
IP Forward
IPv4 or IPv6 address of the media endpoint
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:FORWard
RTP Port Forward
Port for RTP packet forwarding
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
70
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
Cmd Port Forward
Port for the command interface between the DAU and the Rohde & Schwarz media
endpoint.
Remote command:
AMR Alignment Forward
Enter the AMR alignment mode used by the media endpoint.
You can use different modes towards the mobile and towards the media endpoint. See
also "AMR Alignment Mode" on page 68.
Remote command:
Audioboard
Specifies settings for Media Endpoint = "Audioboard":
Enable DTX in DL Audioboard
Enables voice activity detection and the generation of comfort noise parameters during
silence periods. The parameters are sent to the mobile in silence indicator frames.
This setting is not configurable for the EVS audio codec.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AUDioboard
Force Mode Audioboard
Selects the codec rate or bit rate used by the speech codec of the audio board. The
offered values depend on the setting "Codec" on page 67.
Typically, audio tests are performed with a specific rate. Specify this rate here and
ensure that it is enabled in the codec settings.
"SDP"
All rates are allowed. The rate requested by the mobile is used. If it
sends several rates, the highest one is used.
"xxx kbit/s"
The specified AMR codec rate is used.
"Primary xxx
kbps"
The specified EVS primary bit-rate is used.
"AMR-WB IO
xxx kbps"
The specified EVS AMR-WB IO codec rate is used.
"Follow CMR"
Received codec mode requests determine the EVS rate.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AUDioboard
(button)
Accesses the view for mobile-terminating calls, see Chapter 4.1.6.9, "Mobile-Terminating Calls", on page 72.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
71
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
(button)
Accesses the view for mobile-terminating short messages, see Chapter 4.1.6.10,
"Short Messages", on page 75.
OK (button)
When you press the OK button, the internal list of virtual subscriber profiles is updated
according to your changes.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CREate
4.1.6.9
Mobile-Terminating Calls
Mobile-terminating voice over IMS calls are configured and initiated via the "Virtual
Subscribers Configuration" dialog box.
Press the "Virtual Subscriber" hotkey to open the dialog box. In the dialog box, press
to access the view for mobile-terminating calls. It is shown in the followthe button
ing figure.
Figure 4-21: Mobile-terminating call settings
Most call settings are also available as virtual subscriber settings, for example the signaling type and all codec settings. If you modify these virtual subscriber settings, the
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
72
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
corresponding call settings are also modified automatically. Vice versa, if you modify
call settings, this does not affect virtual subscriber settings.
Thus you can use your created virtual subscribers as templates for the call settings
and additionally fine-tune the call settings.
To initiate a call, proceed as follows:
1. Select a virtual subscriber tab at the top.
The related call settings are displayed.
2. Modify the call settings as desired.
3. Press the "Call" button.
For more detailed instructions, see "Setting up a mobile-terminating voice over IMS
call" on page 27.
The view contents are described in the following.
(button)................................................................................................73
(button)................................................................................................................... 73
(button)................................................................................................................... 73
Destination.................................................................................................................... 73
Call Type....................................................................................................................... 74
Signaling Type.............................................................................................................. 74
Audio Codec..................................................................................................................74
Video Codec, Video Attributes...................................................................................... 74
Dedicated Bearer.......................................................................................................... 74
AMR Settings................................................................................................................ 74
EVS Settings................................................................................................................. 74
Call (button)...................................................................................................................74
(button)
Accesses the virtual subscriber view of the dialog box, see Chapter 4.1.6.8, "Virtual
Subscriber Settings", on page 64.
(button)
Accesses this view (no effect when view is already displayed).
(button)
Accesses the view for mobile-terminating short messages, see Chapter 4.1.6.10,
"Short Messages", on page 75.
Destination
Selects the destination to be called. The list is filled during registration.
Each destination has the following format: <Contact ID>[<Public User ID>], for example "1001[tel:5551001]".
The <Contact ID> is a unique four-digit number, assigned automatically during registration. The first digit equals the number of the subscriber profile. The remaining three
digits are a counter. Example: The first registration for subscriber profile 1 gets <Contact ID> = 1001.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
73
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The <Public User ID> equals tel:555<Contact ID>. During registration, this public user
ID is registered in addition to the public user IDs configured for the used subscriber
profile.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination:LIST?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination
Call Type
Selects the type of call to be set up: audio call or video call.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:TYPE
Signaling Type
Signaling type as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "Signaling Type" on page 66.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:SIGType
Audio Codec
Audio codec selection as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "Codec" on page 67.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:TYPE
Video Codec, Video Attributes
Video codec settings as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "Video" on page 70.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:CODec
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:
ATTRibutes
Dedicated Bearer
Dedicated bearer setting as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "Dedicated Bearer"
on page 67.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:BEARer
AMR Settings
AMR codec settings as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "AMR" on page 67.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:ALIGnment
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:
CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle
EVS Settings
EVS codec settings as in the virtual subscriber profile, see "EVS" on page 68.
Call (button)
The "Call" button initiates a voice over IMS call to the mobile.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
74
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The dialog box is closed automatically. You can check the call state in the "Events"
area of the main view.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:CALL
4.1.6.10
Short Messages
Incoming mobile-originating short messages sent from the mobile to a virtual subscriber are displayed in the main view, see Chapter 4.1.6.4, "Event Details",
on page 56.
Mobile-terminating short messages to be sent to the mobile are configured and initiated via the "Virtual Subscribers Configuration" dialog box. This dialog box is described
in the following.
Press the "Virtual Subscriber" hotkey to open the dialog box. In the dialog box, press
the button
to access the view for mobile-terminating short messages. It is shown in
the following figure.
Figure 4-22: Mobile-terminating short message settings
(button)................................................................................................76
(button)................................................................................................................... 76
(button)................................................................................................................... 76
Destination.................................................................................................................... 76
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
75
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
SMS Type..................................................................................................................... 76
Text............................................................................................................................... 76
Send (button)................................................................................................................ 76
(button)
Accesses the virtual subscriber view of the dialog box, see Chapter 4.1.6.8, "Virtual
Subscriber Settings", on page 64.
(button)
Accesses the view for mobile-terminating calls, see Chapter 4.1.6.9, "Mobile-Terminating Calls", on page 72.
(button)
Accesses this view (no effect when view is already displayed).
Destination
Selects the destination to which the short message shall be sent.
The list of destinations is the same as for mobile terminating calls, see "Destination"
on page 73.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination
SMS Type
Selects the type of the short message to be sent to the mobile. You can send short
messages using 3GPP or 3GPP2 signaling procedures. For 3GPP2, there is a variant
with delivery acknowledgment and one without acknowledgment.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TYPE
Text
Specifies the text of the short message to be sent to the mobile.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TEXT
Send (button)
Sends a short message with the specified settings to the mobile.
The dialog box is closed automatically. You can check the message transfer in the
"Events" area of the main view and at the mobile.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:SEND
4.1.7 ePDG Tab

This tab configures and controls the evolved packet data gateway (ePDG) of the DAU.
Option R&S CMW-KA065 is required to see the tab and to use the ePDG service.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
76
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
In a 3GPP core network, the ePDG is the gateway to an untrusted non-3GPP access
technology, for example to a WLAN gateway. The main role of the ePDG is to provide
security mechanisms. For a secure connection via the untrusted WLAN, an IPsec tunnel is established between the DUT and the ePDG.
The ePDG is for example used for WLAN traffic offload tests. See also Chapter 3.6,
"Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload", on page 30.
The ePDG tab shows an event log and information about established IPsec tunnels
between the ePDG and DUTs.
Figure 4-23: Data Application Control - ePDG tab
4.1.7.1
ePDG Service Control.............................................................................................77

ePDG Event Log..................................................................................................... 78
ePDG Connection Information................................................................................ 78
Accessing ePDG Settings....................................................................................... 79
ePDG IP and ID Settings........................................................................................ 79
IKE Settings............................................................................................................ 80
ESP Settings...........................................................................................................81
P-CSCF IKEv2 Attributes........................................................................................ 82
Authentication Settings........................................................................................... 82
Dead Peer Detection Settings.................................................................................84
Certificate Settings.................................................................................................. 84
ePDG Service Control

The ePDG service must be running before you can perform WLAN offloading with signaling applications.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
77
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Service Control
right-click the "ePDG Service" softkey.
4.1.7.2
ePDG Event Log

The event log area reports events and errors like ePDG service state changes, IPsec
tunnel establishment/release, offload events and authentication failure.
Figure 4-24: Event log on the ePDG tab
Event log entries

Each entry consists of a timestamp, an icon indicating the category of the event and a
short text describing the event.
Meaning of the category icons:
4.1.7.3
= information, warning and error
ePDG Connection Information

The ePDG connections area lists all connections that are currently established via the
ePDG.
For each listed connection, an IPsec tunnel has been established between the DUT
and the ePDG. When a connection is released, it is removed from the list.
Figure 4-25: Connection information on the ePDG tab
If there are established connections for several DUTs (IMSIs), a separate node is displayed for each IMSI.
Connection information
There is one row per connection, providing the following information:
Connection ID, displayed in square brackets. The ID is for example used in the
event log when events related to this connection occur.
Access point name (APN)
DUT IPv4 and IPv6 address
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
78
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Additional information, for example protocol configuration options (PCO)
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CONNections:IMSI?
4.1.7.4
Accessing ePDG Settings

Press the "Config" hotkey to open the "ePDG Configuration" dialog box.
The dialog box provides all settings described in the following sections
Figure 4-26: Configuration dialog box
4.1.7.5
ePDG IP and ID Settings

The top of the configuration tree configures the address and ID of the ePDG.
Figure 4-27: IP and ID settings
ePDG IP Configuration
Configures the IPv4 and IPv6 address of the ePDG.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVFour
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVSix
ePDG ID Configuration
Configures the type and the value of the ePDG identification.
The ePDG identifies itself according to these settings in messages to the DUT.
The ID types are specified in RFC 5996. The following types are supported:
"ID_IPv4_ADDR": four-octet IPv4 address
"ID_FQDN": fully-qualified domain name string
"ID_RFC822_ADDR": fully-qualified RFC 822 email address string
"ID_IPV6_ADDR": sixteen-octet IPv6 address
"ID_KEY_ID": opaque octet stream
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
79
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:TYPE
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:VALue
4.1.7.6
IKE Settings
This section is related to the IPsec protocol internet key exchange version 2 (IKEv2). It
is used for authentication before setup of an IPsec tunnel.
Figure 4-28: IKE settings
All enabled values are supported by the ePDG. The value to be used will be negotiated
with the DUT.
In each section, at least one value supported by your DUT must be enabled. Otherwise, authentication will fail.
To use Wireshark for connections with IPsec, see Chapter 3.11, "Configuring Wireshark for IPsec", on page 36.
The listed values are specified in RFC 5996. That RFC references other RFCs indicated in the following in brackets.
Encryption..................................................................................................................... 80
PRF............................................................................................................................... 80
Integrity......................................................................................................................... 81
Diffie Hellman................................................................................................................81
Encryption
Selects the encryption algorithms supported by the ePDG. In the current software version, only one value is available: "ENCR_AES_CBC" (see RFC 3602).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:ENCRyption
PRF
Selects the pseudorandom functions supported by the ePDG.
Available values:
"PRF_HMAC_MD5" (RFC 2104)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
80
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"PRF_HMAC_SHA1" (RFC 2104)
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:PRF
Integrity
Selects the integrity protection algorithms supported by the ePDG.
Available values:
"AUTH_HMAC_SHA1_96" (RFC 2404)
"AUTH_HMAC_MD5_96" (RFC 2403)
"AUTH_AES_XCBC_96" (RFC 3566)
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:INTegrity
Diffie Hellman
Selects the Diffie-Hellman groups supported by the ePDG.
Available values (specified in RFC 5996 and RFC 6989):
"DH_GROUP_1": 768-bit MODP
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:DHGRoup
4.1.7.7
ESP Settings
This section is related to the IPsec protocol encapsulating security payload (ESP). It is
used for encryption of data for transfer via an IPsec tunnel.
Figure 4-29: ESP settings
All enabled values are supported by the ePDG. The value to be used will be negotiated
with the DUT.
In each section, at least one value supported by your DUT must be enabled.
Encryption..................................................................................................................... 81
Integrity......................................................................................................................... 82
Encryption
Selects the encryption algorithms supported by the ePDG.
The available values are the same as for IKEv2, see "Encryption" on page 80.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
81
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:ENCRyption
Integrity
Selects the integrity protection algorithms supported by the ePDG.
The available values are the same as for IKEv2, see "Integrity" on page 81.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:INTegrity
4.1.7.8
P-CSCF IKEv2 Attributes

This section configures attributes related to the transport of P-CSCF addresses via
IKEv2.
The default values are compliant with RFC 7651.
Figure 4-30: Attribute settings
IPv4 Type...................................................................................................................... 82
IPv6 Type...................................................................................................................... 82
IPv6 Address Length.....................................................................................................82
IPv4 Type
Attribute type field of the P_CSCF_IP4_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVFour:TYPE
IPv6 Type
Attribute type field of the P_CSCF_IP6_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:TYPE
IPv6 Address Length
Length field of the P_CSCF_IP6_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:ADDRess:LENGth
4.1.7.9
Authentication Settings
The settings in this section are related to the authentication procedure. They must be
compatible to the SIM of the DUT. Otherwise, authentication will fail.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
82
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-31: Authentication settings
IMSI...............................................................................................................................83
Authentication Algorithm............................................................................................... 83
Secret Key.....................................................................................................................83
RAND............................................................................................................................ 83
AMF...............................................................................................................................83
Key Type....................................................................................................................... 83
Authentication OPc........................................................................................................ 84
IMSI
15-digit international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI), must match the IMSI on the SIM
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:IMSI
Authentication Algorithm
Key generation algorithm set used by the SIM: MILENAGE algorithms (see 3GPP TS
35.205) or XOR algorithms
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:ALGorithm
Secret Key
Authentication key K as 32-digit hexadecimal number, as stored on the SIM or the DUT
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY
RAND
Random number to be used
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:RAND
AMF
Authentication management field as 4-digit hexadecimal number
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:AMF
Key Type
Key type to be used with the MILENAGE algorithm set (fixed value)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
83
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY:TYPE
Authentication OPc
OPc value used by the SIM, as 32-digit hexadecimal number
Only relevant and configurable if the MILENAGE algorithm set is used, see "Authentication Algorithm" on page 83
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:OPC
4.1.7.10
Dead Peer Detection Settings

With enabled dead peer detection, the ePDG detects and releases unused IPsec tunnels.
Figure 4-32: Dead peer detection settings
Enable
Enables dead peer detection.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:ENABle
Interval, Timeout
If the ePDG receives no packets via an established tunnel within the configured "Interval", the ePDG sends a message to the DUT.
If the ePDG receives no answer to this message within the configured "Timeout", it
releases the IPsec tunnel.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:INTerval
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:TIMeout
4.1.7.11
Certificate Settings
The following settings are related to SSL certificates.
If you want to use SSL without certificates, disable the checkbox.
If you want to use an SSL certificate:
Store the server certificate file and the key file with the private key of the server on
the samba share, in the directory security\certificates\epdg.
Only pem files are supported.
Store the server certificate file on the DUT.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
84
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Ensure that the ePDG ID used in the server certificate matches the configured
ePDG ID, see "ePDG ID Configuration" on page 79.
Enable the checkbox in the following settings.
Select the key file and the certificate file via the following parameters. The list
offers only pem files stored in the correct directory on the samba share.
Figure 4-33: SSL certificate settings
Enable........................................................................................................................... 85
Server Key, Server Certificate.......................................................................................85
Enable
Enables the usage of certificates for SSL.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:ENABle
Server Key, Server Certificate
Select the key file and the certificate file. Only pem files are listed.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:KEY
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:CERTificate
4.1.8 Common Softkeys, Hotkeys and Parameters

Some GUI elements are displayed independent of the selected tab. They are described below.
DAU Unit (parameter)
This information is displayed at the top of the "Data Application Control" dialog. It indicates the state of the entire DAU unit (on, off, pending).
By default, the DAU is switched on and there is no need to switch it off for regular operation. However, the DAU can be switched off and on again for troubleshooting, see
"DAU Unit (softkey)" on page 85.
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe
DAU Unit (softkey)
To reboot the DAU for troubleshooting, select the "DAU Unit" softkey and press ON |
OFF or RESTART | STOP twice (i.e. switch the DAU off and on again). Alternatively,
right-click the softkey.
The current state of the DAU is indicated by the softkey and at the top of the "Data
Application Control" dialog.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
85
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Data Application Measurements
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe
Select Applic (hotkey)
Selects the tab to be displayed in the "Data Application Control" dialog.
Network Drive map (hotkey)
The DAU has a hard disk which can be used for data storage. This drive can be
accessed from the Microsoft Windows Explorer.
The hotkey opens a dialog for changing the assigned drive letter.
4.2 Data Application Measurements

Data application measurements require option R&S CMW-KM050. Activate the measurements via the "Measurement Controller" dialog, entry "Data Appl. > Measurements". You can then access the main view of the measurements dialog from the task
bar.
The "Data Application Measurements" dialog contains common elements at the top,
one overview tab and one tab per DAU measurement. Refer to the following sections
for a detailed description.
RAN Selection.........................................................................................................86
Overview Tab.......................................................................................................... 87
Ping Tab..................................................................................................................88
IPerf Tab................................................................................................................. 90
Throughput Tab.......................................................................................................94
DNS Requests Tab................................................................................................. 96
IP Logging Tab........................................................................................................98
IP Analysis Tab..................................................................................................... 101
IP Replay Tab....................................................................................................... 115
Audio Delay Tab....................................................................................................118
Network Impairments............................................................................................ 122
Common Softkeys and Hotkeys............................................................................124
4.2.1 RAN Selection

DAU measurements can be performed for connections established via signaling applications.
Via "Select RAN" at the top of the "Data Application Measurements" dialog, you can
select a signaling application. As a consequence, the expected maximum throughput
for this signaling application is displayed and quick access softkeys for this signaling
application are activated.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
86
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-34: Top of dialog
The selection has no effect on measurement results. It is just a convenience function.

For quick access softkeys, see "Signaling Parameter (softkey)" on page 125 and "...
Signaling (softkey)" on page 125.
Select RAN
Select an installed signaling application instance. Only applications supporting DAU
tests are listed, e.g. LTE Signaling.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?
Max. Possible Throughput
Display the expected maximum UL/DL throughput resulting from the current signaling
application settings.
Remote command:
n/a, use the commands provided by the signaling application
4.2.2 Overview Tab

The tab provides an overview of the DAU measurements, including the state of each
measurement and selected measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
87
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-35: Data Application Measurements - Overview tab
Areas Ping, IPerf, ...

Each area shows the state and selected measurement results of the corresponding
measurement.
For details about the measurements, refer to the following sections:
Chapter 4.2.3, "Ping Tab", on page 88
Chapter 4.2.4, "IPerf Tab", on page 90
Chapter 4.2.5, "Throughput Tab", on page 94
Chapter 4.2.6, "DNS Requests Tab", on page 96
Chapter 4.2.7, "IP Logging Tab", on page 98
Chapter 4.2.8, "IP Analysis Tab", on page 101
Chapter 4.2.9, "IP Replay Tab", on page 115
Chapter 4.2.10, "Audio Delay Tab", on page 118
4.2.3 Ping Tab

The "Ping" measurement sends ping requests to a configurable IP address and displays the resulting ping latency in a diagram.
The "Ping" tab allows you to configure the properties of the ping command and displays the result diagram.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
88
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-36: Data Application Measurements - Ping tab
Result Diagram............................................................................................................. 89
Average / Minimum / Maximum.....................................................................................89
'No Reply' Count........................................................................................................... 89
Config............................................................................................................................90
Measurement Control....................................................................................................90
Result Diagram
The diagram provides a graphical presentation of the measured ping latency for each
ping request. The X-axis indicates the processed ping requests, with the last processed request labeled 0, the previously processed request labeled -1 and so on.
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING?
READ:DATA:MEAS:PING?
Average / Minimum / Maximum
The values below the diagram indicate the average, minimum and maximum of all values in the diagram.
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:OVERall?
'No Reply' Count
Indicates the number of ping requests with no reply. In the result diagram, such
requests are displayed as gaps (ping latency = 0 ms).
The reason for the latest ping request with no reply is indicated below the parameter,
e.g. timeout or no route to host.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
89
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:NRCount?
Config
Configures the properties of the ping command.
"Destination IP": IP address that you want to ping
"Interval": pinging interval
"Timeout": timeout for unanswered ping requests
"Payload": packet size used as probe
"Ping Count": number of echo request packets to be sent
You can change values that are not grayed out even during the measurement, for
example, the "Interval".
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:DIPaddress
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:INTerval
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:TIMeout
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PSIZe
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PCOunt
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "Ping" softkey.
The softkey shows the current measurement state. Additional measurement substates
may be retrieved via remote control.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:PING
STOP:DATA:MEAS:PING
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:PING
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe:ALL?
4.2.4 IPerf Tab

The "IPerf" measurement uses the open source tool IPerf to evaluate the throughput
and reliability of a connection in uplink and/or downlink direction.
For a measurement, the IPerf tool must be running at both ends of a connection. At the
end sending data, it is configured as "client" and at the end receiving data, as "server".
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
90
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-37: Role of servers and client instances in the context of IPerf
The "IPerf" tab allows you to configure up to 8 server instances and 8 client instances
at the DAU in parallel. For configuration of IPerf at the mobile side, see Chapter 3.10,
"Configuring Iperf on the Mobile", on page 36.
The main view of the "IPerf" tab shows the first three instances together with the main
parameters. To display all instances, press the softkey "Expand Table".
The diagram below the instances displays the measurement results.
Figure 4-38: Data Application Measurements - IPerf tab
All instances can be fully configured using the "IPerf Config" dialog, which can be
opened via the "Config" hotkey.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
91
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-39: Data Application Measurements - IPerf Config dialog, Servers
Figure 4-40: Data Application Measurements - IPerf Config dialog, Clients
The elements of the main view and of the configuration dialog are described below.
Results.......................................................................................................................... 92
Test Duration.................................................................................................................92
Packet Size................................................................................................................... 92
Server Settings..............................................................................................................93
Client Settings............................................................................................................... 93
Results
The bar graph indicates up to three result bars per instance:
"Uplink": bit rate measured in uplink direction for active server instances
"Downlink": bit rate transmitted in downlink direction for active client instances
"Lost Packets": percentage of packets lost during the measurement, for active
server instances with protocol type UDP
The uplink and downlink bit rates are also indicated in the instance table above the bar
graph. The lost packet percentage is also indicated below the bar graph.
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:ALL?
Test Duration
Defines the time the test should last.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:TDURation
Packet Size
Defines the packet size for IPerf tests (payload bytes), applicable to UDP and TDD.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
92
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The packet size is especially important if you want to use a low UDP bit rate. In order
to reach this bit rate, configure the packet size according to the following rules:
Convert the bit rate to byte/s and divide it by an integer number (divisor n) to derive
the packet size.
Use the smallest possible divisor n, resulting in an integer packet size.
Ensure that the packet size is smaller than or equal to the maximum payload size,
resulting from the configured MTU (MTU minus overhead), see also "Maximum
Transmission Unit (MTU)" on page 42. If necessary, use a larger divisor n.
Example:
MTU = 1500 byte, UDP bit rate = 23 kbit/s = 2875 byte/s
The smallest possible divisor n equals 5. It results in a packet size of 575 byte. This
packet size is smaller than the maximum payload size.
With a packet size of 575 byte, exactly 5 packets are transferred per second, in order
to reach a bit rate of 23 kbit/s (5 * 575 byte/s * 8 bit/byte = 23 kbit/s).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:PSIZe
Server Settings
Defines the properties of the server instances for uplink direction (DAU receives data
from the mobile):
"Use"
Specifies whether the server instance is used.
"UDP or TCP"
Selects the protocol type to be used.
"Port"
Specifies the LAN DAU port number for the connection. This value must match the
mobile's client port settings.
"Window size"
Specifies the TCP receiving window size (for TCP only)
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:ENABle
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PROTocol
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PORT
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:WSIZe
Client Settings
Defines the properties of the client instances for downlink direction (DAU sends data to
the mobile).
"Use"
Specifies whether the client instance is used.
"UDP or TCP"
Selects the protocol type to be used.
"Port"
Specifies the LAN DAU port number for the connection. This value must match the
mobile's server port settings.
"UE IP Address"
Specifies the IP address of the mobile.
"Window size"
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
93
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Specifies the size of the NACK window (in kByte), for TCP only.
"Parallel Connections"
Specifies the number of parallel connections for the selected port, for TCP only.
"Bit rate"
Specifies the maximum bit rate to be transferred, for UDP only.
If the bit rate is not reached, check the packet size, see "Packet Size" on page 92.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:ENABle
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PROTocol
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PORT
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:IPADdress
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:WSIZe
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PCONnection
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:BITRate
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "Iperf" softkey.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe:ALL?
4.2.5 Throughput Tab

The "Throughput" measurement reports the overall throughput at the DAU on IP level,
in uplink and downlink direction. The entire packets are considered, including the IP
header - in contrast to IPerf measurements that consider only the payload. Several
mobile connections may contribute to the overall throughput.
Please note that the measured downlink data rate on IP level and the downlink data
rate on lower layers might differ. The lower layers might not be able to transfer the set
IP data rates and discard IP packets.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
94
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-41: Data Application Measurements - Throughput tab
Results.......................................................................................................................... 95
Settings......................................................................................................................... 95
Results
The diagram shows the overall throughput on IP level vs. time.
"Uplink" indicates the received bit rate measured at the DAU while "Downlink" indicates
the bit rate transmitted to the mobile. In downlink direction, the throughput values on
RLC or MAC level can differ from those on IP level.
Below the diagram, the measured/transmitted current, minimum and maximum
throughput values are displayed.
Remote command:
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?
Plus corresponding FETCh commands.
Settings
Press the "Config" hotkey to access the measurement settings.
Figure 4-42: Measurement settings
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
95
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"Interval": displays the time interval between two throughput measurement results
"Max. array size": specifies the maximum number of result values in the result trace
Example: Interval 1 s plus size 5 means that there are up to 5 results in the trace,
at the X-axis positions "0 s" to "-4 s". Older results are discarded.
"Traces visibility": allows you to show / hide the individual traces in the diagram
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:INTerval?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "Throughput" softkey.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
STOP:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe:ALL?
4.2.6 DNS Requests Tab

The "DNS Requests" measurement monitors all DNS queries addressed to the internal
DNS server of the DAU.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
96
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-43: Data Application Measurements - DNS req. tab
Results.......................................................................................................................... 97
Settings......................................................................................................................... 97
Results
The "Request Count" indicates the number of recorded DNS queries.
The table below provides a list of the recorded requests and answers, including the following information for each request:
"Client IP": IP address of the client (mobile) that has sent the DNS request
"Requested Domain / Application": Information that shall be resolved by the DNS
query. A type A or type AAAA DNS query indicates a domain, while a type SRV
DNS query indicates an application name.
"Resolved IP / Domain": Information returned for the DNS query. A successful type
A or type AAAA DNS query returns the IP address of the requested domain. A successful type SRV DNS query returns a domain supporting the requested application.
"Timestamp": Time when the query was received.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:RCOunt?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests?
Settings
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
97
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"Max. Index Count": specifies the maximum length of the result list (number of
requests). The result list is stored in a ring buffer. When it is full, the first result line
is deleted whenever a new result line is added to the end.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEASurement<inst>:DNSRequests:MICount
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "DNS Requests" softkey.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
STOP:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe:ALL?
4.2.7 IP Logging Tab

The "IP Logging" application allows you to create signaling log files for the IP layer
communication at the DAU. You can monitor either the user plane communication
between the DAU and the mobile or you can monitor the communication at the LAN
DAU connector.
The log files are created in a format compatible with Wireshark, a network protocol
analyzer which is available free of charge. You can download Wireshark from http://
www.wireshark.org. If Wireshark is installed at the instrument, you can open created
log files directly from the "IP Logging" tab to analyze them in Wireshark. For encrypted
connections, see also Chapter 3.11, "Configuring Wireshark for IPsec", on page 36.
The hard disk operations required for IP logging impact the performance of the DAU.
Thus measurement results can be distorted by IP logging. Switch off IP logging especially for throughput measurements.
The contents of the "IP Logging" tab, the related configuration dialog and the related
softkeys and hotkeys are described below.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
98
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-45: Data Application Measurements - IP Logging tab
Contents of the tab........................................................................................................99

Hotkeys......................................................................................................................... 99
Settings....................................................................................................................... 100
Logging Control...........................................................................................................100
Contents of the tab
At the top, the "IP Logging" tab displays the configured logging interface and the folder
and name of the currently used log file.
The lower part of the tab lists the log files stored on the hard disk of the DAU. The files
are stored in directory ip_logging of the samba share. Connected USB storage
devices like USB sticks are also displayed.
"Selected File" at the bottom refers to the file currently selected in the list above. The
button "Open" opens the selected file in Wireshark. If Wireshark is not installed, the
button is grayed-out. It is recommended to connect a mouse in order to use Wireshark.
Without a mouse, you can return to the GUI of the DAU by pressing SYS at the front
panel or CTRL+ALT+D at a connected keyboard.
Hotkeys
The "IP Logging" tab provides several hotkeys for file operations.
You can for example copy/paste the currently selected log file to a USB stick or delete
a log file. Or you can change an automatically assigned file name.
Before pressing a hotkey, select the desired folder or file in the "IP Logging" tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
99
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Settings
Press the "Config" hotkey to access the IP logging settings.
Figure 4-46: IP logging settings
"Logging Interface":
Selects which interface shall be monitored. To monitor the communication at the
LAN DAU connector, select "LAN-DAU".
To monitor the communication with the mobile, select "U-Plane..." depending on
the traffic type to be monitored:
"U-Plane IP": IP unicast traffic, for example relevant for LTE, WCDMA, GSM,
WLAN and CDMA2000 1xEV-DO (eHRPD)
"U-Plane PPP": PPP encapsulated IP traffic, for example relevant for
CDMA2000 1xRTT / 1xEV-DO (HRPD)
"U-Plane Multicast": IP multicast traffic, for example relevant for LTE
With this selection, only the downlink multicast traffic is monitored. The unicast
answers in the uplink are not monitored. Option R&S CMW-KA150 is required
for multicast traffic.
"Log File Name":
If IP logging is on, the name of the currently used log file is displayed. If IP logging
is off, a file with the displayed name will be created when logging is started.
The name is defined automatically. It contains information about the DAU measurement instance, the logging interface and an index. The index is increased
automatically, so that an existing file is never overwritten.
"Advanced Settings":
The advanced settings allow you to limit logging. "0" means no limit.
"File Size": limits the size of the log file. When this file size is reached, logging
stops.
"Packet Counter": limits the number of IP packets to be logged. When this
number of packets is reached, logging stops.
"Snap Length": limits the number of bytes to be logged for each IP packet. If
the packet is longer, only the specified number of bytes is logged. The remaining bytes of the packet are ignored.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:TYPE
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FNAMe?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FSIZe
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PCOunter
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PSLength
Logging Control
Turn logging on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively,
right-click the "IP Logging" softkey.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
100
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The softkey shows the current state. Additional substates may be retrieved via remote
control.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe:ALL?
4.2.8 IP Analysis Tab

The "IP Analysis" application monitors all IP traffic from or to the mobile. This includes
traffic between the mobile and the DAU as well as traffic between the mobile and an
external destination, passing the DAU.
Typical use cases are for example:
Analysis of reasons for too low throughput. Use the "TCP Analysis" view to check
the number of retransmissions, the TCP window size and the overhead.
Debugging of applications, for example smartphone apps, by analysis of the IP

traffic caused by the applications.
In general: getting an overview / a statistical evaluation of all IP connections
Option R&S CMW-KM051 is required for "IP Analysis". Without this option, the "IP
Analysis" tab is hidden.
4.2.8.1
Overview
The results of the "IP Analysis" application are displayed in an overview and several
detailed views. The overview summarizes the most important results. If you are interested in a specific part of the overview, expand this part by opening the related
detailed view.
For a description of the individual results, refer to the detailed view sections.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
101
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-47: IP Analysis Overview
Opening another view................................................................................................. 102

Disabling views / Assign View hotkey......................................................................... 102
Export DB (hotkey)......................................................................................................103
Measurement Control..................................................................................................103
Opening another view
Use the "Select View" hotkey to display a specific detailed view or to return to the overview.
Alternatively, you can select a part of the overview and press ENTER or the rotary
knob to open the related detailed view.
Disabling views / Assign View hotkey
The "Assign View" hotkey enables/disables the individual detailed views. If a detailed
view is disabled, the related results are not measured, the view cannot be shown and
the related parts of the overview are hidden.
Configure the views before turning on the measurement. Any already measured results
are lost if you change the settings (enable or disable a view).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult[:ALL]
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:TCPanalysis
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:IPConnect
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:DPCP
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:FTTRigger
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:VOIMs
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
102
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Export DB (hotkey)
Stores the IP analysis result database to a .csv file on the DAU hard disk.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:EXPortdb
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "IP Analysis" softkey.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe:ALL?
4.2.8.2
Detailed View: TCP Analysis

The main purpose of the "TCP Analysis" view is to detect problems decreasing the performance of TCP/IP connections.
To this end you can define thresholds. The table at the top of the view lists all connections and indicates whether and which thresholds are exceeded. The lower part of the
view shows details for the connection currently selected in the table.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
103
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-48: TCP Analysis view
Results........................................................................................................................ 104
Threshold Configuration..............................................................................................105
Results
A threshold check is performed for three properties of each connection, for the downlink as well as for the uplink. If a threshold is exceeded, this is indicated by a red NOK
or FULL, otherwise a green OK is displayed.
The three checked properties are:
"TCP Win.":
Current TCP window size as percentage of the negotiated maximum window size.
The maximum window size defines how many bytes may be transmitted without
waiting for an acknowledgment. Or in other words: how many unacknowledged
bytes may be on the way simultaneously.
If the current window size reaches the maximum window size, no more packets are
sent until acknowledgments are received. So a too small maximum window size
decreases the throughput.
"Retrans.":
Retransmisions as percentage of all transmissions.
Retransmissions decrease the throughput.
"Overhead":
Percentage of the packet consumed by headers (non-payload part of the packet).
A high overhead reduces the payload and thus the throughput.
In addition to the threshold check results for these properties, the downlink and uplink
throughput are displayed for each connection.
Select a connection to display additional properties in the lower table:
IP Source / Destination: Address and port of the source that has initiated the connection and of the destination addressed by the source.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
104
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Maximum TCP Window: Maximum TCP window size negotiated for the connection.
Current TCP Window, Retransmitted Data, Overhead: Measured values used for
the threshold checks.
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:FLOWid?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:DETails?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:ALL?
Threshold Configuration
Press the "Config" hotkey to access the threshold settings.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TWSThreshold
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TRTHreshold
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TOTHreshold
4.2.8.3
Detailed View: IP Connectivity

This view provides an overview of all connections that have been opened since the
measurement was started. Still open connections are listed as well as already closed
connections.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
105
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-50: IP Connectivity view
Filtering and Sorting

Use the settings above the table to filter or sort the table.
You can filter the table according to the connection status: "open" connections only,
"closed" connections only or "both".
"Sorting" selects the table column to be used for sorting. The button toggles between
ascending and descending order.
Press the hotkey "Filter" to access additional filter settings:
Select a filter column and enter a filter text. You can enter a single value or a commaseparated list of values. Wildcards are not supported.
Results
The top of the view provides statistical information.
The table in the lower part lists the following information for each connection:
"Conn. Status": Connection still open or already closed
"L4 Prot.": Layer 4 protocol (transport layer)
"L7 Prot.": Layer 7 protocol (application layer)
"IP Source", "Source Port": IP address and port of the source that has initiated the
connection
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
106
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"IP Destination", "Dest. Port": IP address and port of the destination addressed by
the source
"Overh. Down / Up": Percentage of a packet consumed by headers (non-payload
part of the packet), for downlink and uplink
"Avg. P-Size Down / Up": Average packet size for downlink and uplink
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:STATistics?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:FLOWid?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:ALL?
4.2.8.4
Detailed View: Data Pie Charts

This view analyzes the amount of data transported since the measurement was started.
The results are displayed as a list and as a pie chart. For each list entry, the transported data is given as absolute number and as percentage of the total transported data.
All values indicate the sum of downlink and uplink.
The list and the pie chart are linked. Select an entry in the list to highlight the corresponding part of the pie chart.
At the top of the view, you can select a view variant "Data per ...". The specifics of the
individual categories are described in the following sections.
Data Per Connection
The view provides an overview of the amount of data transported via the individual
connections since the measurement was started.
Figure 4-51: Data Pie Charts view - per connection
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
107
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The term "Remote Destination" refers to the partner destination of the mobile (mobile
at one end of the connection, "Remote Destination" at the other end).
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPConnection?
Data Per Protocol
The view provides an overview of the amount of data transported via the individual protocols since the measurement was started.
Figure 4-52: Data Pie Charts view - per protocol
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPPRotocol?
Data Per Layer
The view provides a layer-based overview of the amount of data transported since the
measurement was started.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
108
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-53: Data Pie Charts view - per layer
At the top, select the layer you are interested in.

Examples of features, applications or protocols for the individual layers:
Feature layer: audio, video, SMS, ...
Application layer: Facebook, IMS, YouTube, Spotify, Skype, ...
Layer 7: SIP, RTP, HTTP, ...
Layer 4: TCP, UDP, ICMP, IGMP, ...
Layer 3: IPv4 or IPv6
The packets are analyzed at the selected layer. If a packet cannot be assigned at this
layer, it is analyzed at the next lower layer and so on, until it can be assigned to a category (feature, application or protocol).
If you select the application layer for example, the results list mainly applications. For
packets that cannot be assigned to an application, the L7 protocol is listed. And for
packets that cannot be assigned to a L7 protocol, the layer 4 protocol is listed.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer:LAYer
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer?
Data Per Application
The view provides an overview of the amount of data transported via the individual
applications since the measurement was started.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
109
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-54: Data Pie Charts view - per application
You can select an application and display information for a lower layer.
To navigate to the next lower layer:
Double-click an entry in the "Application" column, or
Select an entry in the "Application" column and press the hotkey "Detailed View"
In the following example, this action has been performed three times, to navigate from
the application layer (IMS) through layer 7 (RTP) and layer 4 (UDP) to layer 3 (IPv6).
This path is displayed as "Selected Application Path".
To navigate back to the next higher layer:

Click "Back" or press the hotkey "Back"
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?
4.2.8.5
Detailed View: Flow Throughput and Trigger

The upper diagram provides a throughput history per connection. You can select up to
10 connections to be displayed in parallel.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
110
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The lower diagram displays a history of the open and close events (number of connections opened or closed per second).
The history covers the previous hour. Configure the X-axis to select the time period
you are interested in. The two diagrams are synchronized and show the same time
period.
Figure 4-55: Flow Throughput and Event Trigger view
Selecting the connections displayed in the upper diagram

1. Press the softkey "Display" then the hotkey "Traces <-> Flows".
2. Enable/disable the traces as desired and enter the IDs of the connections to be
displayed.
The "IP Connectivity" view provides a good overview of all connections and their
IDs.
Configuring diagram axes
Press the softkey "Display" then the hotkey "X Scale" or "Y Scale".
"X Scale" configures the X-axis of both diagrams, "Y Scale" the Y-axis of the upper
diagram.
Using markers to display IDs in the lower diagram
1. Press the softkey "Marker" then the hotkey "Ref Marker".
2. Configure the "Start Events" marker for "open" events and the "End Events" marker
for "close" events.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
111
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
As a result, the IDs of all connections opened at the "Start Events" marker position
are listed above the diagram. The IDs of all connections closed at the "End Events"
marker position are listed below the diagram.
Results
The upper diagram displays the total throughput (uplink plus downlink) of selected connections vs. time. The X-axis indicates the time in seconds, with 0 corresponding to
"now".
The lower diagram indicates the number of connections opened per second as positive
bars and the number of connections closed per second as negative bars. The labels
above/below the bars indicate the ID of one opened/closed connection. To improve the
display of labels, zoom into the diagram (scale the X-axis). To display all IDs of a
selected bar, see Using markers to display IDs in the lower diagram.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACe<TraceIndex>:
TFLowid
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACes<TraceIndex>:
FTHRoughput?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:STARt?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:END?
4.2.8.6
Detailed View: Voice Over IMS

This view provides information about all voice over IMS audio or video calls that have
been established via the internal IMS server since the measurement was started.
In the upper part, the view contains an overview table that lists all voice over IMS calls.
The subtabs in the lower part provide additional information for one or more calls,
selected in the table column "Details".
Table (upper part)
The table contains one row per voice over IMS call.
Figure 4-56: Voice Over IMS view - upper part
Table columns:
"Id.": Call ID
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
112
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"Details": Selects the calls, for which detailed information shall be displayed in the
subtabs of the lower part
"Flows": IDs of the flows used by the call
The same IDs are displayed in other views, for example the "IP Connectivity" view
and the "Flow Throughput and Trigger" view. So you can use the flow IDs to correlate the information in different views.
"Call": Call type audio, video or emergency
"Origin": Mobile-terminating (MT) call initiated by the DAU or mobile-originating
(MO) call initiated by the mobile
"State": One of the following call states:
Ringing - MT call setup started, mobile is ringing
Established - call established
Released - established call has been released
Hold - call on hold
"Start": Time when the call setup was initiated (INVITE message sent/received)
"Setup": Duration of the call setup procedure (from INVITE message to first RTP
packet)
"Duration": Duration of the call (from INVITE message to BYE/Cancel)
"User From": User ID or phone number of the calling party
For an MO call the calling party is the UE. For an MT call, the calling party is the
DAU, simulating a calling UE.
"User To": User ID or phone number of the called party
For an MT call the called party is the UE. For an MO call, the called party is the
DAU, simulating a called UE.
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:ALL?
Flows Info subtab (lower part)
This subtab displays a table with one line per flow and direction. The listed flows are
related to the calls selected in the upper part, column "Details".
Figure 4-57: Voice Over IMS view - Flows Info subtab
For each flow, the following information is displayed:

"Id.": Call ID, same value as in the upper part
"Flow ID": Same values as in the upper part, column "Flows".
"Direc.": Flow direction, uplink or downlink
The two directions are always evaluated separately, even for a bidirectional flow.
"Type": Flow type, audio or video
"Codecs": Name of used codec
"Seq. Number": Sequence number of the currently processed packet
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
113
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
"#Packets": Number of already processed packets

"Throughput": Current audio or video data throughput at the RTP level
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:FLOWs?
Packets Meas subtab (lower part)
This subtab displays the results of packet measurements for the calls selected in the
upper part, column "Details". You can display the bar graphs of up to four calls in parallel. Each X-axis label corresponds to one call.
Figure 4-58: Voice Over IMS view - Packets Meas subtab
The following measurement results are displayed per direction:

Packet error rate (PER): Number of lost or corrupt packets as percentage of the
total number of packets
Discontinuous transmission (DTX) rate: Number of silent packets as percentage of
the total number of packets
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:PERDtx?
Jitter subtab (lower part)
This subtab displays the jitter measured for the calls selected in the upper part, column
"Details". You can display the bar graphs of up to four calls in parallel. Each X-axis
label corresponds to one call.
The jitter is measured separately for the uplink and the downlink direction. The maximum, average and minimum jitter for the entire call duration are displayed.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
114
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-59: Voice Over IMS view - Jitter subtab
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:JITTer?
4.2.9 IP Replay Tab

The "IP Replay" application allows you to replay previously captured IP traffic. This is
for example useful for multicast tests, where you record the multicast (for example a
video stream) into a file and then replay it to the mobile under test.
The IP traffic must be captured into a pcap file (packet capture file). This is for example possible with Wireshark. The "IP Logging" application of the DAU also creates
pcap files.
You can replay a single pcap file or several pcap files in parallel. The traffic can be
sent to the mobile or to the LAN DAU connector.
If you want to replay traffic to a mobile, establish a connection via a signaling application or a protocol test application, before proceeding.
To replay captured files, proceed as follows:
1. Store the files to the samba share of the DAU, into the folder ip_replay.
2. Press the "Edit Playlist" hotkey and configure the playlist.
All files added to the list will be played simultaneously.
3. Start the "IP Replay" application.
4. If the playlist contains more than one file, sequentially select each file in the upper
part of the tab. This triggers file analysis and display of the resulting information.
Wait until information is displayed for all files.
5. Press the "Play" hotkey to start the playlist.
The contents of the "IP Replay" tab and the related dialogs, softkeys and hotkeys are
described below.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
115
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-60: Data Application Measurements - IP Replay tab
Playlist (upper part of tab)........................................................................................... 116

Connection Information (lower part of tab)..................................................................117
Play/Stop (hotkeys)..................................................................................................... 117
Clear Playlist (hotkey)................................................................................................. 117
Edit Playlist (hotkey)....................................................................................................117
Application Control...................................................................................................... 118
Playlist (upper part of tab)
The upper part of the tab lists information about all files in the playlist. To derive this
information, the application must analyze the files.
The first file is analyzed automatically as soon as the "IP Replay" application is started.
The other files are only analyzed if you select them in the list.
Analyzing a large file takes some time. Analyzing many large files in parallel may affect
the performance of the DAU. The results of measurements running in parallel may be
distorted.
The information listed for each file includes:
File name, number of IP packets in the file, file size, bit rate and duration of the file
"Progress" displays a progress bar for each file, while the files are replayed.
"Type" indicates the file type and information about the application used for capturing the file.
Only pcap files can be replayed. If a different type is displayed, the file is no pcap
file, in spite of its pcap file name extension.
"Encapsulation" indicates whether the file contains raw IP traffic or IP traffic plus
ethernet headers.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
116
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PROGress?
Connection Information (lower part of tab)
The lower part of the tab lists all IP connections contained in the pcap file that is
selected in the upper part.
The information listed for each IP connection includes:
The layer 4 protocol and the number of IP packets
The IP address and port number of the sender (source) and of the recipient (destination) of the IP packets
Remote command:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile?
Play/Stop (hotkeys)
The "Play" hotkey starts replaying the playlist. The "Stop" hotkey aborts replaying. It is
not possible to pause and continue a replay.
The "Play" hotkey is only active if the "IP Replay" application is running and the playlist
is not empty.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STOPall
Clear Playlist (hotkey)
The "Clear Playlist" hotkey is only active if the "IP Replay" application is switched off.
The hotkey removes all files from the playlist.

Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:REMovelist
Edit Playlist (hotkey)
The "Edit Playlist" hotkey is only active if the "IP Replay" application is switched off.
It opens a dialog for configuration of the playlist.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
117
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The left part lists all pcap files stored in the directory ip_replay of the samba share.
The right part displays the playlist contents.
Double-click a file on the left to add it to the playlist. Double-click a file in the playlist to
remove it from the list.
For each file in the list, you can configure how often the file shall be replayed and to
which network interface:
"U-Plane IP": IP unicast traffic to the mobile
"U-Plane Multicast": IP multicast traffic to the mobile
"LAN-DAU": IP traffic to the LAN DAU connector
Remote command:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:FILelist?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:ITERation
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INTerface
Application Control
Turn the "IP Replay" application on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP
keys. Alternatively, right-click the "IP Replay" softkey.
The softkey shows the current state. Additional substates may be retrieved via remote
control.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe:ALL?
4.2.10 Audio Delay Tab

The "audio delay" measurement analyzes an established voice over IMS call. It determines how long the audio information needs to pass the R&S CMW. And it determines
the timing error of audio packets received in the uplink direction.
Set up only a single call to get meaningful measurement results.
There are two measurement modes, depending on the media endpoint used by the
call. The used media endpoint is configured in the settings of the virtual subscriber
involved in the call, see "Media Endpoint" on page 70.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
118
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
For calls with the media endpoint "Audioboard", "Uplink" and "Downlink" results are
displayed.
Figure 4-61: Audio Delay tab, media endpoint "Audioboard"
For calls with the media endpoint "Loopback", only "Loopback" results are displayed.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
119
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Figure 4-62: Audio Delay tab, media endpoint "Loopback"
Delay Result Diagram................................................................................................. 120

Time of Arrival Result Diagram................................................................................... 121
Result Table................................................................................................................ 121
Settings....................................................................................................................... 121
Measurement Control..................................................................................................122
Delay Result Diagram
The upper diagram shows the measured audio delays vs. the received samples. Each
sample corresponds to 20 ms.
The audio delay is the system simulator delay of the R&S CMW. It is measured
according to the following definition specified in 3GPP TS 26.132 Rel-12:
"Uplink":
The system simulator delay in the uplink (UE sending) direction TTES is the delay
between the last bit of a speech frame at the system simulator antenna (R&S CMW
RF input connector) and the first electrical event at the electrical access point of
the test equipment (R&S CMW audio output connector).
"Downlink":
The system simulator delay in the downlink (UE receive) direction TTER is the delay
between the first electrical event at the electrical access point of the test equipment
(R&S CMW audio input connector) and the first bit of the corresponding speech
frame at the system simulator antenna (R&S CMW RF output connector).
"Loopback":
The system simulator delay in echo mode TSS is the delay between the last bit of a
received speech frame at the system simulator antenna (R&S CMW RF input connector) and the first bit of the looped back speech frame at the system simulator
antenna (R&S CMW RF output connector).
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
120
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
For "Uplink" and "Loopback", ensure that the DUT has enough audio input to send an
audio packet every 20 ms. Silence periods may result in skipped audio packets and
peaks in the trace. A peak every 8 samples for example means that the DUT has sent
an audio packet every 160 ms.
Remote command:
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?
Time of Arrival Result Diagram
The lower diagram shows the timing error of audio packets received in the uplink direction. Ideally, an audio packet is received every 20 ms and a flat line at 0 ms is shown.
Remote command:
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?
Result Table
The table below the diagrams provides a statistical evaluation for all measurement
results.
The "Current" value refers to the sample number 0 in the diagrams.
The "Average", "Minimum" and "Maximum" values are calculated from all results since
the beginning of the measurement.
Remote command:
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?
Settings
"Interval": displays the fixed time interval between two display updates
"Samples per Interval": displays the fixed number of measurement samples per
interval
"Maximum Samples": configures the maximum size of the X-axis of the diagrams.
Measured data is kept within that range. Older data is discarded.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
121
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SPINterval?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SAMPles?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples
Measurement Control
Turn the measurement on or off using the ON | OFF or RESTART | STOP keys. Alternatively, right-click the "Audio Delay" softkey.
Remote command:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
STOP:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe:ALL?
4.2.11 Network Impairments

Real networks are usually not perfect. IP packets may for example be lost, delayed,
reordered, duplicated or corrupted.
Such network impairments can be simulated by the DAU. They can be applied to all IP
traffic from the DAU to a specific destination IP address. The destination can for example be a mobile or a host at the LAN DAU connector.
The network impairments can be configured and controlled from all measurement tabs.
Press the "Network Impairm." softkey to open the configuration dialog.
Figure 4-64: Network impairments configuration dialog
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
122
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
The configuration table contains seven columns, each providing a set of impairments.
A set of impairments is either applied to a specific default bearer, identified via the destination IP address or to a specific dedicated bearer, identified via destination IP
address plus port range.
To apply network impairments to a bearer, configure one of the columns according to
your needs: Specify the destination IP address and the port range of the bearer and
configure the impairments. Enable the column via the checkbox at the top and press
the button "Impairm. ON" at the bottom of the dialog.
The individual settings are described briefly below. For a more detailed description of
the effects of the individual settings, see Chapter 7, "Annex: Network Impairments",
on page 275.
Used............................................................................................................................123
IP Address, Port Range Start/End.............................................................................. 123
Packetloss Rate.......................................................................................................... 123
Delay........................................................................................................................... 123
Jitter, Jitter Distribution................................................................................................124
Reordering Rate..........................................................................................................124
Duplicates Rate...........................................................................................................124
Corruption Rate...........................................................................................................124
Network Impairment Activation................................................................................... 124
Used
A set of impairments is only applied if this parameter is enabled. Ensure that you
enable only one set for a certain default bearer or dedicated bearer at a time.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:ENABle
IP Address, Port Range Start/End
These parameters select the bearer to which the impairments shall be applied. To
specify a default bearer, enter its destination IP address and specify zero for both port
parameters. To specify a dedicated bearer, enter its destination IP address and the
port range used by the bearer.
As IPv6 address, you can enter an IPv6 address or an IPv6 prefix. Examples:
IPv6 address: fc01:abab:cdcd:efe0::2
IPv6 prefix: fc01:abab:cdcd:efe0::/64
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:IPADdress
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PRANge
Packetloss Rate
On average, the specified percentage of outgoing IP packets will be discarded.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PLRate
Delay
Delays all outgoing IP packets by the specified time.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
123
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DELay
Jitter, Jitter Distribution
The jitter specifies a packet delay variation. The maximum accepted jitter value equals
the specified delay time.
The distribution of the total delays is defined via the "Jitter Distribution". You can configure a uniform distribution, a normal (Gaussian) distribution, a pareto or a pareto normal distribution.
For details, see Chapter 7.1, "Delay and Jitter", on page 275.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JITTer
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JDIStribut
Reordering Rate
On average, the indicated percentage of outgoing packets is reordered. Reordering is
only possible, if a sufficient delay time is specified.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:RRATe
Duplicates Rate
On average, the indicated percentage of outgoing packets is duplicated.
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DRATe
Corruption Rate
On average, the indicated percentage of outgoing packets is corrupted, by introducing
a single bit error anywhere in the packet (header or payload).
Remote command:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:CRATe
Network Impairment Activation
To apply network impairments, you must configure and enable a set of impairments
(one table column) and globally activate network impairments.
You can activate/deactivate network impairments via the buttons "Impairm. ON/OFF" in
the configuration dialog.
The "Network Impairm." softkey also shows the current state.
Remote command:
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe
4.2.12 Common Softkeys and Hotkeys

Some softkeys and hotkeys are displayed independent of the selected tab or are available for several measurements. These keys are described below. For measurementspecific hotkeys refer to the description off the measurement tab.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
124
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Configure Services (softkey)

Opens the "Data Application Control" dialog, see Chapter 4.1, "Data Application Control Dialog", on page 38.
Use this softkey for quick access, for example in order to configure the IP configuration
or embedded DAU services.
Network Impairm. (softkey)
Opens the "Network Impairments" dialog, see Chapter 4.2.11, "Network Impairments",
on page 122.
Display (softkey)
Some measurements provide a "Display" softkey for configuration of result diagrams.
Press the softkey to display the related hotkeys. Which of the following hotkeys are
available, depends on the measurement.
Hotkey
Description
"Select Traces ..."
Select the trace types to be displayed in the diagram.
"Scale X / Scale Y"
Configure the X-axis and the Y-axis.
Marker (softkey)
Some measurements provide a "Marker" softkey for configuration of markers in result
diagrams. Press the softkey to display the related hotkeys. Which of the following hotkeys are available, depends on the measurement.
Hotkey
Description
"Ref. Marker"
Enable or disable the reference marker and select the marker position. If several traces can be displayed, a trace can also be selected.
"Marker 1/2"
Enable or disable marker 1 or 2 and define the marker position (absolute or relative to the reference marker). If several traces can be displayed, a trace can
also be selected.
Signaling Parameter (softkey)

Provides quick access to essential settings of a coupled signaling application, see
"Select RAN" on page 87.
While the softkey is selected, the "Config" hotkey opens the configuration dialog of the
signaling application, not the configuration dialog of the DAU measurement.
... Signaling (softkey)
This softkey controls the coupled signaling application, see "Select RAN" on page 87.
The softkey label indicates the currently coupled application, for example "LTE 1 Signaling".
Select the softkey and press ON | OFF to turn the downlink signal transmission on or
off. Alternatively, right-click the softkey.
Press the softkey two times (select it and press it again) to switch to the signaling
application.
While the softkey is selected, the "Config" hotkey opens the configuration dialog of the
signaling application, not the configuration dialog of the DAU measurement.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
125
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
GUI Reference
Select Applic (hotkey)

Selects the tab to be displayed.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
126
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
Data Application Control
5 Programming
The following sections provide programming examples for the data application unit.
The examples contain SCPI commands supported by the R&S CMW and the following
symbolic scripting commands:
// <comment>:
A <comment> ignored by the used programming tool
WHILE <expression>:
Waits until the <expression> is not / no longer true. The <expression> usually evaluates a value returned by a query.
WAITKEY <message>:
Displays a dialog box with a <message> and waits until the box is closed by the
user.
PAUSE <time>:
Waits a certain number of seconds.
See also: "Remote Control" in the R&S CMW user manual
Data Application Control....................................................................................... 127

Data Application Measurements........................................................................... 136
5.1 Data Application Control

This section provides programming examples for the SCPI commands with the syntax ...:DATA:CONTrol:....
5.1.1 Rebooting the DAU

During normal operation it is not required to reboot the DAU. But it may make sense for
troubleshooting. In that case, proceed as follows.
// *****************************************************************************
// Switch the DAU off and wait until the procedure is complete.
// Then switch the DAU on again and wait until the reboot is complete.
// *****************************************************************************
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe OFF; *OPC?
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe ON; *OPC?
5.1.2 Configuring General IP Settings

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the maximum transmission unit.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:MTU 1700
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
127
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
5.1.3 Configuring IPv4 Settings

// *****************************************************************************
// Enable static IPv4 address configuration and configure the subnet mask,
// the address of the DAU and the address of the gateway.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:ADDRess:TYPE STATic
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:SMASk '255.255.255.0'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:IPADdress '192.168.168.180'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:GIP '192.168.168.1'
// *****************************************************************************
// Verify which addresses are really currently used.
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the mobile address pool, delete the first entry and add a new entry.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:DELete 0
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:ADD '192.168.168.22'
// *****************************************************************************
// If you configure the mobile address pool via DHCP or use the automatic
// standalone configuration, you can query the pool via the following commands.
// *****************************************************************************
5.1.4 Configuring IPv6 Settings

// *****************************************************************************
// Enable static IPv6 address configuration and configure
// the address of the DAU and the address of the default router.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE STATic
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:ADDRess 'fcb1:c014::1/64'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:DROuter 'fcb1:c014::1'
// *****************************************************************************
// Verify which addresses are really currently used.
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
128
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// Enable static configuration of the mobile address pool.

// Query the mobile address pool, delete the first entry and add a new entry.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MOBile:PREFix:TYPE STATic
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:DELete 0
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:ADD 'fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe3::/64'
// *****************************************************************************
// If you configure the mobile address pool via DHCP or use the automatic
// standalone configuration, you can query the pool via the following commands.
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
// Enable manual configuration of routes and query the existing routes.
// Add two new routes, then delete the first one.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ROUTing:TYPE MAN
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD 'fcb1:014f::/64','fcb1:abcd::1'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD 'fcb1:afce::/64','fcb1:abcd::1'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:DELete 'fcb1:014f::/64'
5.1.5 Configuring DNS Server Settings

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure server types: primary internal and foreign, secondary foreign
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:PRIMary:STYPe IAForeign
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:SECondary:STYPe FOReign
// *****************************************************************************
// Query used primary and secondary DNS server addresses for IPv4 and IPv6.
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure primary and secondary addresses for foreign DNS servers.
// Specify whether an address received via DHCP overrides these addresses.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess '192.168.168.181'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess '192.168.168.182'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess 'fcb1:c014::2'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess 'fcb1:c014::3'
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
129
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:UDHCp ON, OFF, ON, OFF

// *****************************************************************************
// Query the entries of the internal DNS server for type A/AAAA DNS queries.
// Add three new entries and delete the last one.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD 'www.DAU-Home.com', '192.168.168.180'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD 'www.DAU-Home.com', 'fcb1:c014::1'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD 'nonsense', '1.1.1.1'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:DELete 'nonsense'
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the entries of the internal DNS server for type SRV DNS queries.
// Add two new entries and delete the last one.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD 'pcscf', 'www.DAU-Home.com', UDP, 5060
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD 'typo', 'www.x.y', UDP, 5070
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:DELete 'typo'
// *****************************************************************************
// Perform a test of the primary foreign DNS server:
// Specify the domain to be resolved, start the test and retrieve the results.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:DOMain 'www.example.com'
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the internal DNS server.
// *****************************************************************************
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:STATe ON
5.1.6 Configuring the FTP Service

// *****************************************************************************
// Select the FTP service type, allow access from external network,
// enable IPv6 support, allow access for anonymous users - but not upload.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STYPe SERV
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:ENConnection ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:IPVSix ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:AUSer ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:DUPLoad OFF
// *****************************************************************************
// Query information about existing FTP users.
// Create two new FTP users and delete the second one.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
130
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD 'user1', 'newpwdxyz', ON, ON, ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD 'usernametypo', 'pwd', ON, ON, ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:DELete 'usernametypo'
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the FTP service.
// *****************************************************************************
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STATe ON
5.1.7 Configuring the HTTP Service

// *****************************************************************************
// Allow access to internal Web server from external network and
// enable IPv6 support.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:ENConnection ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:IPVSix ON
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the HTTP service.
// *****************************************************************************
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:STATe ON
5.1.8 Configuring IMS Services

Using an external IMS server
// *****************************************************************************
// Specify that an external IMS server shall be used and configure the
// IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of the external P-CSCF.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage EXTernal
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVFour '10.121.10.85'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVSix 'fcb1:cafe:1:c1::1'
The remaining commands in this section are only relevant if the internal IMS server is
used.
Using the internal IMS server
// *****************************************************************************
// Specify that the internal IMS server shall be used and
// configure the UDP/TCP threshold.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage INTernal
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
131
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:SELection CUSTom
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:THReshold:VALue 1000
Configuring P-CSCF profiles

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the first IPv4 P-CSCF so that it rejects requests
// with failure code 500.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf1:BEHaviour FAILure
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf1:FAILurecode 500
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf1:RETRyafter 0
// *****************************************************************************
// Create a new IPv4 P-CSCF that accepts requests.
// As there are two default profiles, the new profile is number 3.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf3:IPADdress '172.22.1.205'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf3:BEHaviour NORMal
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf3:REGexp 1, 1800, 60000
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf3:SUBexp 1, 1800, 60000
// *****************************************************************************
// Update the P-CSCF profile database and query a list of all profile names.
// *****************************************************************************
Configuring subscriber profiles

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the first subscriber profile compatible to the mobile.
// *****************************************************************************
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:PRIVateid '[email protected]'
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:AUTHenticati:SCHeme AKA1
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:AUTHenticati:ALGorithm MIL
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:AUTHenticati:KEY '0x000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f'
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:AUTHenticati:AMF '0x0000'
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:AUTHenticati:OPC '0xcb9dcdc5b9258e6dca4760379fb82581'
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:RESLength 32
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:IPSec:ENABle ON
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:IPSec:ALGorithm:INTegrity HMSH
CONF:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber1:IPSec:ALGorithm:ENCRyption DES
CONF:DATA:CONT:IMS2:SUBS:PUBL2 'sip:[email protected]'
CONF:DATA:CONT:IMS2:SUBS:PUBLicuserid3 'sip:[email protected]'
CONF:DATA:CONT:IMS2:SUBS:PUBLicuserid4 'sip:[email protected]'
// *****************************************************************************
// Update the subscriber profile database and query a list of all profile names.
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
132
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
Configuring virtual subscriber profiles

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the first virtual subscriber profile compatible to the mobile.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:BEHaviour ANSWer
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:SIGNalingtyp NOPRecondit
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:BEARer ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:AMR:TYPE WIDeband
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:AMR:ALIGnment OCTetaligned
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:AMR:CODec3:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:VIDeo:CODec H264
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:VIDeo:ATTRibutes ''
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MEDiaendpoin LOOP
// *****************************************************************************
// Create a new virtual subscriber using the audio board as media endpoint.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:ID 'sip:[email protected]'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:SIGNalingtyp NOPRecondit
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:AMR:TYPE WIDeband
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:AMR:ALIGnment OCTetaligned
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:MEDiaendpoin AUD
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub2:AUDioboard INST1, ON, TWO, TWO
// *****************************************************************************
// Update the virtual subscriber profile database and query a list of all
// profile names.
// *****************************************************************************
Starting the internal IMS server and registering a mobile

The following assumes that a cell signal is available. You can for example use the LTE
signaling application to provide an LTE cell signal. The mobile registers first to the LTE
cell, then to the IMS.
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the internal IMS server.
// *****************************************************************************
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:STATe ON
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
133
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// Switch the mobile on and wait until it has registered to the IMS server.
// You can for example query the information in the "Info" area until it
// reports successful registration. Or insert a pause into your script.
// *****************************************************************************
Performing a mobile-terminating voice over IMS call

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure additional call settings for virtual subscriber 1.
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTCall:DESTination:LIST?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTCall:DESTination '1001[tel:5551001]'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTCall:TYPE AUDio
// *****************************************************************************
// Initiate the call.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTCall:CALL
Updating an established call

// *****************************************************************************
// Select a call, modify the settings and trigger the update.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID '4Mjh7g2CFmd0pMG9Gi93j-8lyly7fzPA'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:TYPE WIDeband
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:ALIGnment OCT
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:CODec8:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:TYPE VIDeo
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:CODec H264
Releasing a call
// *****************************************************************************
// Query a list of all established calls and release one call.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID '4Mjh7g2CFmd0pMG9Gi93j-8lyly7fzPA'
Sending a short message over IMS to the mobile

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the short message.
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST?
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTSMs:DESTination '1001[tel:5551001]'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTSMs:TYPE GPP
CONF:DATA:CONT:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTSMs:TEXT 'Testing SMS 012!.#\*%+-/()<>=;@$,'
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
134
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// *****************************************************************************
// Send the message.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub1:MTSMs:SEND
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the event log contents.
// Query details for one event log entry.
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:HISTory? 'Id.3880694434@fc01:abab:cdcd:efe0::1'
Deregistering a mobile
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the short message.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile1:DERegister
5.1.9 Configuring the ePDG Service

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure ePDG addresses.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVFour '192.168.1.202'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVSix 'fc01::2'
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the ePDG ID.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:TYPE FQDN
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:VALue 'Epdg.rs.org'
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure IKEv2 settings.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:ENCRyption ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:PRF ON, ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:INTegrity ON, ON, ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:DHGRoup ON, ON, ON, ON
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure ESP settings.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:ENCRyption ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:INTegrity ON, ON, ON
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure IKEv2 attribute settings.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
135
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVFour:TYPE 20
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:TYPE 21
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:ADDRess:LENGth L16
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure authentication settings.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:IMSI '001010123456063'
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:ALGorithm MILenage
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY #H102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:RAND #H12ACF4321
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:AMF #H8000
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:OPC #H1233CB71954A9F4E48A5994E37A02BAF
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure dead peer detection.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:INTerval 5
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:TIMeout 30
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the certificate usage for SSL.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:KEY "myKeyFile.pem"
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:CERTificate "myCertificateFile.pem"

This section provides programming examples for the SCPI commands with the syntax ...:DATA:MEAS:....
Most measurements require a signaling connection to the mobile. This could for example be an LTE connection, set up via the LTE signaling application. To set up the signaling connection, use the commands provided by the application.
5.2.1 Configuring Global Settings

// *****************************************************************************
// Query a list of available signaling applications and select one of them.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN 'LTE Sig1'
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
136
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
5.2.2 Configuring Network Impairments

// *****************************************************************************
// Enable and configure the first set of network impairments.
// Switch network impairments on.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:IPADdress '172.22.1.110'
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:PRANge 0, 0
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:PLRate 10
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:DELay 1
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:JITTer 0.5
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:JDIStribut UNIForm
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:RRATe 10
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:DRATe 0
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments1:CRATe 1
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe ON
5.2.3 Performing a Ping Measurement

// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the measurement:
// Specify destination IP address, interval between two requests, timeout,
// payload size and ping count.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:DIPaddress '172.22.1.110'
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:INTerval 0.5
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:TIMeout 3
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PSIZe 50
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PCOunt 10
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the measurement.
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:PING
// *****************************************************************************
// Wait until the measurement is complete ("RDY").
// *****************************************************************************
WHILE FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe? <> 'RDY'
// *****************************************************************************
// Query all results.
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:OVERall?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:NRCount?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
137
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
5.2.4 Performing an IPerf Measurement

The following SCPI commands are related to the IPerf tool at the DAU side of the connection. In parallel you must configure the IPerf tool installed at the mobile side and
start the measurement also there. The mobile side also provides measurement results.
// *****************************************************************************
// Specify the test duration and the packet size.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:TDURation 60
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:PSIZe 1500
// *****************************************************************************
// Enable server instance 1 and select protocol type, port number and
// window size for this server instance.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer1:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer1:PROTocol TCP
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer1:PORT 5001
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer1:WSIZe 64
// *****************************************************************************
// Enable client instance 1 and configure the client instance:
// Select protocol type, port number, mobile IP address, window size,
// parallel connections and maximum UDP bit rate.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:ENABle ON
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:PROTocol TCP
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:PORT 5003
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:IPADdress '172.22.1.110'
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:WSIZe 64
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:PCONnection 2
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent1:BITRate 2E+6
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the measurement at the DAU side (also start the UE side now).
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
// *****************************************************************************
// Implement a loop and insert one of the following commands into the loop
// to query/monitor the results. IPerf delivers new results once per second.
// The first two commands query only a subset of results. The third command
// queries all results.
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:ALL?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
138
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
5.2.5 Performing a Throughput Measurement

// *****************************************************************************
// Specify the test duration.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt 10
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
// *****************************************************************************
// Wait 12 seconds, so that a complete trace can be measured.
// *****************************************************************************
PAUSE 12
// *****************************************************************************
// Query all results.
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk?
// *****************************************************************************
// Alternatively, query the trace results with x-values.
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?
5.2.6 Monitoring DNS Requests

// *****************************************************************************
// Specify the maximum number of DNS requests in the result list.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:MICount 900
// *****************************************************************************
// Start monitoring.
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
// *****************************************************************************
// Wait until at least 10 requests have been monitored.
// *****************************************************************************
WHILE SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:RCOunt? < 10
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
139
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// Query information about the already monitored DNS requests.

// You can repeat this command any time to query updated results.
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests?
5.2.7 Performing IP Logging

// *****************************************************************************
// Specify the interface to be monitored, the maximum log file size, the maximum
// number of IP packets and the maximum number of bytes per packet to be logged.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:TYPE UPIP
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FSIZe 10E+6
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PCOunter 1E+3
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PSLength 30E+3
// *****************************************************************************
// Start logging and query the name of the log file. Wait until logging has
// really started (e.g. before initiating actions to be logged).
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FNAMe?
WHILE FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe? <> 'RUN'
5.2.8 Performing IP Replay

// *****************************************************************************
// Query a list of all available files.
// Add two of the files to the playlist.
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:FILelist?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist 'myfile.pcap',3,MULTicast
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist 'file42.pcap',1,MULTicast
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the IP replay application and wait until it is running.
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
WHILE FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe? <> 'RUN'
// *****************************************************************************
// Trigger analysis of the files. Use a loop to query the results
// repeatedly until the analysis is finished and the results are available.
// *****************************************************************************
WHILE SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile? 'myfile.pcap' = INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV
WHILE SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile? 'file42.pcap' = INV,INV,INV,INV,INV,INV
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
140
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// Query information about the IP connections in the files.

// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile? 'myfile.pcap'
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile? 'file42.pcap'
// *****************************************************************************
// Start playlist execution.
// Continue until the user closes a dialog box. Query the playlist progress.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall
WAITKEY >Check the progress?<
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PROGress?
// *****************************************************************************
// Stop the playlist. Modify the number of iterations for one file and the
// interface for the other file. Play the playlist again.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STOPall
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:ITERation 'file42.pcap',4
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INTerface 'myfile.pcap',IP
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall
// *****************************************************************************
// Switch off the IP replay application and clear the list.
// *****************************************************************************
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:REMovelist
5.2.9 Performing an Audio Delay Measurement

// *****************************************************************************
// Specify the size of the measurement record.
// Query the measurement interval duration and the number of samples per interval.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples 1500
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SAMPles?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SPINterval?
// *****************************************************************************
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
// *****************************************************************************
// Wait 30 seconds, so that a complete trace can be measured.
// *****************************************************************************
PAUSE 30
// *****************************************************************************
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
141
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// Query the results relevant for the media endpoint type "Audioboard".
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk:CURRent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk:CURRent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink:CURRent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the results relevant for the media endpoint type "Loopback".
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback:CURRent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback:CURRent?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?
5.2.10 Performing IP Analysis

// *****************************************************************************
// Enable analysis of all results
// *****************************************************************************
CONF:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:ALL ON,ON,ON,ON,ON
// *****************************************************************************
// Configure the OK/NOK thresholds for the "TCP Analysis" results.
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TWSThreshold 80
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TRTHreshold 9
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TOTHreshold 40
// *****************************************************************************
// Start the IP Analysis application.
// *****************************************************************************
INIT:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the "TCP Analysis" results:
//
threshold check results for connection number 3
//
threshold check results for all connections
//
details for connection number 3
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:FLOWid? 3
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:ALL?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:DETails? 3
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the "IP Connectivity" results:
//
overall statistical connection information
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
142
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
//
connection-specific results for all connections
//
connection-specific results for connection number 3
// *****************************************************************************
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:STATistics?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:FLOWid? 3
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:ALL?
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the "Data Pie Charts" results:
//
data per connection
//
data per protocol
//
data per layer
//
// Query the data per application results of the application layer.
// Navigate to the next lower layer for the IMS application.
// Query the data per application results of layer 7 (for the IMS application).
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPConnection?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPPRotocol?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer? APP
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP 'IMS'
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?
// *****************************************************************************
// Assign connection number 3 to the throughput trace number 3.
// Query the "Flow Throughput and Event Trigger" results:
//
throughput trace number 3
//
"open" events trace
//
"close" events trace
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACe3:TFLowid 3
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACes3:FTHRoughput?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:STARt?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:END?
// *****************************************************************************
// Query the "Voice Over IMS" results:
//
information at call level
//
information at flow level
//
measured DTX and PER
//
measured jitter
// *****************************************************************************
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:ALL?
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:FLOWs? 34, 36, DL, VIDeo
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:PERDtx? 132
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:JITTer? 132
// *****************************************************************************
// Store the IP analysis result database to a file
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
143
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Programming
// *****************************************************************************
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:EXPortdb
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
144
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Conventions and General Information
6 Command Reference
The following sections provide detailed reference information on the remote control
commands related to the Data Application Unit (DAU).
Conventions and General Information.................................................................. 145

Data Application Control....................................................................................... 148
Data Application Measurements........................................................................... 212
6.1 Conventions and General Information

The following sections describe the most important conventions and general informations concerning the command reference.
6.1.1 MEAS
MEAS is used as abbreviation of "MEASurement<instance>". For better readability
only the abbreviated form (which is also accepted by the instrument) is given in the
command reference.
The <instance> is relevant for instruments supporting several instances of the same
firmware application. It can be omitted if the instrument supports only one instance, or
to address the first instance.
See also: "Firmware Applications" in the R&S CMW user manual, chapter "Remote
Control"
6.1.2 Keywords
Selected keywords used in the command description are described in the following.
Command usage
If the usage is not explicitly stated, the command allows you to set parameters and
query parameters. Otherwise the command usage is stated as follows:
"Setting only": command can only be used to set parameters
"Query only": command can only be used to query parameters
"Event": command initiates an event
Parameter usage
The parameter usage is indicated by the keyword preceding the parameter(s):
"Parameters" are sent with a setting or query command and are returned as
the result of a query
"Setting parameters" are only sent with a setting command
"Query parameters" are only sent with a query command (to refine the query)
"Return values" are only returned as the result of a query
Firmware/Software:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
145
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Indicates the lowest software version supporting the command. Command

enhancements in later software versions are also indicated.
6.1.3 Reliability Indicator

The first value in the output arrays of FETCh...?, READ...? and CALCulate...?
queries indicates the most severe error that has occurred during the measurement.
Example for an output array: 0, 10.22, 10.15, 10.01, 10.29, 100 (reliability = 0, followed
by 5 numeric measurement values).
The reliability indicator has one of the following values:
0 (OK):
Measurement values available, no error detected.
1 (Measurement Timeout):
The measurement has been stopped after the (configurable) measurement timeout. Measurement results may be available, however, at least a part of the measurement provides only INValid results or has not completed the full statistic count.
2 (Capture Buffer Overflow):

The measurement configuration results in a capture length, exceeding the available memory.
3 (Overdriven) / 4 (Underdriven):
The accuracy of measurement results may be impaired because the input signal
level was too high / too low.
6 (Trigger Timeout):
The measurement could not be started or continued because no trigger event was
detected.
7 (Acquisition Error):
The R&S CMW could not properly decode the RF input signal.
8 (Sync Error):
The R&S CMW could not synchronize to the RF input signal.
9 (Uncal):
Due to an inappropriate configuration of resolution bandwidth, video bandwidth or
sweep time, the measurement results are not within the specified data sheet limits.
15 (Reference Frequency Error):

The instrument has been configured to use an external reference signal but the reference oscillator could not be phase locked to the external signal (e.g. signal level
too low, frequency out of range or reference signal not available at all).
16 (RF Not Available):

The measurement could not be started because the configured RF input path was
not active. This problem may occur e.g. when a measurement is started in combined signal path mode and the master application has not yet activated the input
path. The LEDs above the RF connectors indicate whether the input and output
paths are active.
17 (RF Level not Settled) / 18 (RF Frequency not Settled):
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
146
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
The measurement could not be started because the R&S CMW was not yet ready
to deliver stable results after a change of the input signal power / the input signal
frequency.
19 (Call not Established):

For measurements: The measurement could not be started because no signaling
connection to the DUT was established.
For DAU IMS service: Establishing a voice over IMS call failed.
20 (Call Type not Usable):

For measurements: The measurement could not be started because the established signaling connection had wrong properties.
For DAU IMS service: The voice over IMS settings could not be applied.
21 (Call Lost):
For measurements: The measurement was interrupted because the signaling connection to the DUT was lost.
For DAU IMS service: The voice over IMS call was lost.
23 (Missing Option):
The ARB file cannot be played by the GPRF generator due to a missing option.
24 (Invalid RF Setting):
The desired RF TX level or RF RX reference level could not be applied.
26 (Resource Conflict):
The application could not be started or has been stopped due to a conflicting hardware resource or software option that is allocated by another application.
Stop the application that has allocated the conflicting resources and try again.
27 (No Sensor Connected):

The GPRF External Power Sensor measurement could not be started due to missing power sensor.
30 (File not Found):

The specified file could not be found.
40 (ARB File CRC Error):

The ARB file CRC check failed. The ARB file is corrupt and not reliable.
42 (ARB Header Tag Invalid):

The ARB file selected in the GPRF generator contains an invalid header tag.
43 (ARB Segment Overflow):

The number of segments in the multi-segment ARB file is higher than the allowed
maximum.
44 (ARB File not Found):

The selected ARB file could not be found.
45 (ARB Memory Overflow):

The ARB file length is greater than the available memory.
46 (ARB Sample Rate out of Range):

The clock rate of the ARB file is either too high or too low.
47 (ARB Cycles out of Range):

The repetition mode equals "Single Shot" and the playback length is greater than
40 s. Please reduce the playback length or set the repetition mode to "Continuous".
<Length> = (<Cycles> * <Samples> + <Additional Samples>) / <Clock Rate>
50 (Startup Error):
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
147
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
The Data Application Unit (DAU), a DAU service or a DAU measurement could not
be started. Please execute a DAU selftest.
51 (No Reply):
The DAU has received no response, for example for a ping request.
52 (Connection Error):
The DAU could not establish a connection to internal components. Please restart
the instrument.
53 (Configuration Error):
The current DAU configuration by the user is incomplete or wrong and could not be
applied. Check especially the IP address configuration.
54 (Filesystem Error):
The hard disk of the DAU is full or corrupt. Please execute a DAU selftest.
101 (Firmware Error):

Indicates a firmware or software error. If you encounter this error for the first time,
restart the instrument.
If the error occurs again, consider the following hints:
Firmware errors can often be repaired by restoring the factory default settings.
To restore these settings, restart your instrument and press the "Factory
Default" softkey during startup.
If a software package (update) has not been properly installed this is often indicated in the "Setup" dialog, section "SW/HW-Equipment > Installed Software".
A software update correcting the error may be available. Updates are e.g. provided in the "CMW Customer Web" on GLORIS (registration required): https://
extranet.rohde-schwarz.com.
If you get firmware errors even with the properly installed latest software version,
please send a problem report including log files to Rohde & Schwarz.
102 (Unidentified Error):

Indicates an error not covered by other reliability values. For troubleshooting
please follow the steps described for "101 (Firmware Error)".
103 (Parameter Error):

Indicates that the measurement could not be performed due to internal conflicting
parameter settings.
A good approach to localize the conflicting settings is to start with a reset or preset
or even restore the factory default settings. Then reconfigure the measurement
step by step and check when the error occurs for the first time.
If you need assistance to localize the conflicting parameter settings, please contact
Rohde & Schwarz (see http://www.service.rohde-schwarz.com).
104 (Not Functional):

The application could not be started with the configured parameter set.
6.2 Data Application Control

This section describes commands for configuration of the IP settings, configuration and
control of the DAU services and control of the DAU unit.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
148
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Reset
The Data Application Control settings are considered as system settings and are thus
not affected by the command *RST.
However, the commands SYSTem:RESet:BASE and SYSTem:RESet:ALL reset also
system settings, including the Data Application Control settings. The "*RST:" information in the command descriptions indicates the result of these commands.
The commands for "Data Application Control" are divided into the following groups.
Control of the DAU Unit.........................................................................................149

General IP Settings............................................................................................... 149
IPv4 Settings.........................................................................................................150
IPv6 Settings.........................................................................................................154
DNS Server Settings............................................................................................. 159
FTP Service.......................................................................................................... 167
HTTP Service........................................................................................................170
IMS Service...........................................................................................................171
ePDG Service....................................................................................................... 202
6.2.1 Control of the DAU Unit

The following command controls the DAU unit and retrieves its current state.
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe <Control>
Switches the DAU unit on or off. These actions are irrelevant for normal operation of
the DAU. For troubleshooting a reboot of the DAU can be initiated by switching if off
and on again.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Switch DAU ON or OFF
Return values:
<DAUState>
OFF | PENDing | ON
OFF: DAU switched off
PEND: DAU has been switched on and is booting
ON: DAU switched on and ready for operation
*RST:
Example:
ON
See Rebooting the DAU
Firmware/Software: V3.0.10
Manual operation:
See "DAU Unit (parameter)" on page 85
6.2.2 General IP Settings

The following commands configure IP settings applicable to IPv4 and to IPv6.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
149
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:MTU <MaxTransUnit>
Specifies the MTU, that is the maximum IP packet size that can be transmitted without
fragmentation.
Parameters:
<MaxTransUnit>
Example:
Range:
552 byte to 4096 byte
*RST:
1500 byte
Default unit: byte
See Configuring General IP Settings
Manual operation:
See "Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)" on page 42
6.2.3 IPv4 Settings

The following commands configure the IPv4 settings and query the resulting current IP
configuration.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:ADDRess:TYPE....................................................... 150
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:IPADdress.................................................... 151
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:SMASk.........................................................151
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:GIP..............................................................151
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:IPADdress?.....................................................151
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:SMASk?......................................................... 152
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:GIP?...............................................................152
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:ADD.......................................... 152
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:DELete...................................... 153
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:CATalog?........................................ 153
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:DHCP:ADDResses:CATalog?..........................................153
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:AUTomatic:ADDResses:CATalog?...................................153
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:ADDRess:TYPE <AddressType>
Selects the type of the IPv4 configuration.
Parameters:
<AddressType>
AUTomatic | STATic | DHCPv4

AUTomatic: predefined internal IP configuration
STATic: user-defined static IP configuration defined via the
commands
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:...
DHCPv4: the IPv4 address is obtained from a DHCP server in
the company LAN
*RST:
Example:
AUT
See Configuring IPv4 Settings
Firmware/Software: V1.0.15.20
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "IPv4 Address Configuration" on page 43
150
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:IPADdress <IPAddress>
Sets the IP address of the DAU to be used for static IPv4 configuration.
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
IP address as string
Range:
*RST:
Example:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
'192.168.168.170'
Manual operation:
See "IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask" on page 43
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:SMASk <SubnetMask>
Defines the subnet mask for static IPv4 configuration.
Parameters:
<SubnetMask>
Subnet mask as string

Range:
*RST:
Example:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
'255.255.255.0'
Manual operation:
See "IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask" on page 43
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:GIP <GatewayIP>
Defines the address of an external gateway to be used for static IPv4 configuration.
Parameters:
<GatewayIP>
Range:
*RST:
Example:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
'192.168.168.1'
Manual operation:
See "Gateway IP" on page 44
Queries the current IPv4 address of the DAU.
Return values:
<IPAddress>
Range:
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
151
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Related commands" on page 41
Queries the subnet mask of the current IPv4 data testing configuration.
Return values:
<SubnetMask>
Subnet mask as string

Range:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the current IPv4 address of the gateway server.
Return values:
<GatewayIP>
Range:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:ADD <IPAddress>
Adds a new IP address to the mobile IPv4 address pool for static IPv4 configuration.
Setting parameters:
<IPAddress>
Range:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Mobile IPv4 Address Pool" on page 44
152
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:DELete <IPAddress>
Deletes an address from the mobile IPv4 address pool for static IPv4 configuration.
Setting parameters:
<IPAddress>
IP address to be deleted, either identified via its index number or
as string
Range:
0 to <total number of entries> - 1 | '0.0.0.0' to

'255.255.255.255'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Mobile IPv4 Address Pool" on page 44
Queries the current mobile IPv4 address pool configured statically.
Return values:
<IPAddress>
Comma separated list of strings. Each string represents a static

mobile IPv4 address.
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the current mobile IPv4 address pool configured via DHCPv4.
Return values:
<IPAddress>

Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the current mobile IPv4 address pool configured automatically (standalone
setup).
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
153
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<IPAddress>

Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.2.4 IPv6 Settings

The following commands configure the IPv6 settings.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE..........................................................154
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:ADDRess....................................................... 155
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:DROuter.........................................................155
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:IPADdress?.......................................................155
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:DROuter?..........................................................155
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MOBile:PREFix:TYPE................................................. 156
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:ADD............................................... 156
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:DELete............................................156
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:CATalog?..............................................157
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:DHCP:PREFixes:CATalog?............................................... 157
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:AUTomatic:PREFixes:CATalog?........................................ 157
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ROUTing:TYPE.......................................................... 157
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD............................................... 158
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:DELete............................................158
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:CATalog?..............................................158
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE <AddressType>
Selects the method to be used for IPv6 DAU address configuration.
Parameters:
<AddressType>
AUTO | STATic | ACONf

AUTO: predefined automatic configuration (standalone setup)
STATic: static IP configuration
ACONf: dynamic autoconfiguration
*RST:
Example:
AUTO
V3.0.10: all parameter values changed
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "LAN IPv6 Address Configuration" on page 45
154
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:ADDRess <IPAddress>
Sets the IP address of the DAU to be used for static IPv6 configuration.
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
IPv6 address as string

*RST:
Example:
'fcb1:cafe::1/64'
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:DROuter <Router>
Sets the IP address of the external default router to be used for static IPv6 configuration.
Parameters:
<Router>

*RST:
Example:
'fcb1:cafe::1'
Manual operation:
Queries the current IPv6 address of the DAU.
Return values:
<IPAddress>
IPv6 address as string, e.g. 'fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::1/64'
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the IPv6 address currently used to address the default router.
Return values:
<DefRouter>
IPv6 address as string, e.g. 'fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::1'
Example:
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
155
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MOBile:PREFix:TYPE <PrefixType>
Selects the method to be used for mobile IPv6 prefix configuration.
This setting is only relevant for test setups with connected external network. It is
ignored for a Standalone test setup (AUTO set via CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:
IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE on page 154).
Parameters:
<PrefixType>
STATic | DHCP
STATic: static IP configuration
DHCP: DHCP prefix delegation
*RST:
Example:
STAT
Manual operation:
See "Mobile IPv6 Prefix Configuration" on page 46
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:ADD <Prefix>
Adds a new 64 bit prefix to the mobile IPv6 prefix pool for static IPv6 configuration.
Setting parameters:
<Prefix>
String, e.g. 'fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::/64'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:DELete <Prefix>
Deletes an address from the mobile IPv6 prefix pool for static IPv6 configuration.
Setting parameters:
<Prefix>
Entry to be deleted, either identified via its index number or its
prefix string
Range:
0 to <total number of entries> - 1 | '<prefix>'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
156
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Queries the current mobile IPv6 prefix pool configured statically.
Return values:
<Prefixes>
Comma separated list of strings, each string representing a pool

entry
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the current mobile IPv6 prefix pool configured via DHCP prefix delegation.
Return values:
<Prefixes>

entry
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the current mobile IPv6 prefix pool configured automatically (standalone
setup).
Return values:
<Prefixes>

entry
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ROUTing:TYPE <RoutingType>
Selects the mechanism to be used for IPv6 route configuration. The configured routes
are only relevant for packets sent by the mobile with destination addresses neither
belonging to the subnet of the DAU nor reachable via the default router.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
157
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<RoutingType>
MANual
In the current software version the value is fixed.
MANual: manually configured routes
*RST:
Example:
MANual
Manual operation:
See "Routing" on page 46
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD <Prefix>, <Router>

Adds a new route to the pool of manual routes for IPv6. If the destination address of a
packet matches the <Prefix>, it is routed to the <Router>.
Setting parameters:
<Prefix>
String, e.g. 'fcb1:abab:cdcd:efe0::/64', 64 bit and shorter prefixes
allowed
<Router>
Router address as string, e.g. 'fcb1:abcd:17c5:efe0::1'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:DELete <Prefix>
Deletes an entry from the pool of manual routes for IPv6.
Setting parameters:
<Prefix>
Entry to be deleted, either identified via its index number or its
prefix string
Range:
0 to <total number of entries> - 1 | '<prefix>'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries the pool of manual routes for IPv6.
The two values listed below are returned for each route: {<Prefixes>, <Routers>}entry 0,
{<Prefixes>, <Routers>}entry 1, ...
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
158
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<Prefixes>
String specifying an IPv6 prefix
<Routers>
IPv6 address of assigned router as string
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.2.5 DNS Server Settings

The following commands configure the DNS server settings and start/stop the local
DNS server.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:PRIMary:STYPe............................................................ 159
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:SECondary:STYPe........................................................ 159
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess?.................................160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess?.............................160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess?...................................160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess?............................... 161
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess..............................161
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess..........................161
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess................................162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess............................162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:UDHCp........................................................... 162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD................................................................... 163
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:DELete............................................................... 163
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:CATalog?................................................................. 163
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD............................................................ 164
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:DELete........................................................ 164
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:CATalog?.......................................................... 164
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:DOMain............................................................... 165
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:STARt................................................................. 165
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:RESults?................................................................... 165
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:STATe..............................................................................166
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:PRIMary:STYPe <SType>
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:SECondary:STYPe <SType>
Select the primary and secondary DNS server type.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
159
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<SType>
NONE | INTernal | IAForeign | FOReign

NONE: no DNS server address sent to the mobile
INTernal: use local DNS server
IAForeign: use local DNS server, if no entry found then foreign
DNS server
FOReign: use foreign DNS server
*RST:
Example:
primary INT, secondary NONE
See Configuring DNS Server Settings
Manual operation:
See "DNS Server Info for the mobile" on page 48
Queries the IPv4 address sent to the mobile as primary DNS server address.
Return values:
<CDNSPrimIP4>
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the IPv4 address sent to the mobile as secondary DNS server address.
Return values:
<CDNSSecIP4>
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
Queries the IPv6 address sent to the mobile as primary DNS server address.
Return values:
<CDNSPrimIP6>
Example:
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
160
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
Queries the IPv6 address sent to the mobile as secondary DNS server address.
Return values:
<CDNSSecIP6>
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess
<FDNSPrimIP4>
Specifies the IPv4 address of the foreign primary DNS server.
Parameters:
<FDNSPrimIP4>

Range:
*RST:
Example:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
'192.168.168.171'
Manual operation:
See "Foreign DNS server" on page 49
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess
<FDNSSecIP4>
Specifies the IPv4 address of the foreign secondary DNS server.
Parameters:
<FDNSSecIP4>

Range:
*RST:
Example:
'0.0.0.0' to '255.255.255.255'
'192.168.168.171'
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
161
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess
<FDNSPrimIP6>
Specifies the IPv6 address of the foreign primary DNS server.
Parameters:
<FDNSPrimIP6>

*RST:
Example:
'fcb1:cafe::2'
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess
<FDNSSecIP6>
Specifies the IPv6 address of the foreign secondary DNS server.
Parameters:
<FDNSSecIP6>

*RST:
Example:
'fcb1:cafe::2'
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:UDHCp <PrimIP4>, <PrimIP6>,

<SecIP4>, <SecIP6>
Specifies whether an IP address received via DHCPv4 / DHCPv6 shall be used (if
available) instead of the IPv4 / IPv6 address configured statically for the foreign DNS
server.
Parameters:
<PrimIP4>
OFF | ON
DHCPv4 address, primary DNS server
*RST:
<PrimIP6>
ON
OFF | ON
DHCPv6 address, primary DNS server
*RST:
<SecIP4>
ON
OFF | ON
DHCPv4 address, secondary DNS server
*RST:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
ON
162
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<SecIP6>
OFF | ON
DHCPv6 address, secondary DNS server
*RST:
Example:
ON
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD <URL>, <IP>

Adds an entry to the database of the local DNS server for type A or type AAAA DNS
queries.
Each entry consists of two strings, one specifying a domain and the other indicating the
assigned IP address.
Setting parameters:
<URL>
String specifying the URL of a domain, e.g. 'www.example.com'
<IP>
Assigned IPv4 address or IPv6 address as string, e.g.

'192.168.168.170' or 'fcb1:abab:1::1'
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Internal DNS entries" on page 49
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:DELete <URLorIP>
Deletes an entry from the database of the local DNS server for type A or type AAAA
DNS queries.
Each entry consists of two strings, one specifying a domain and the other indicating the
assigned IP address. Enter one of these strings to select the entry to be deleted.
Setting parameters:
<URLorIP>
String selecting the entry to be deleted
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries the entries of the local DNS server database for type A or type AAAA DNS
queries.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
163
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
The two values listed below are returned for each database entry: {<Url>, <IP>}entry 0,
{<Url>, <IP>}entry 1, ...
Return values:
<Url>
String specifying the URL of a domain
<IP>
Assigned IPv4 address or IPv6 address as string
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD <Name>, <Url>, <Protocol>,

<Port>
Adds an entry to the database of the local DNS server for type SRV DNS queries.
Setting parameters:
<Name>
String specifying the service name, e.g. 'pcscf'
<Url>
String specifying the URL of the domain, e.g. 'www.example.com'
<Protocol>
UDP | TCP
<Port>
Range:
Example:
Usage:
Event
0 to 65654
Manual operation:
See "Application Services" on page 49
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:DELete <Name>
Deletes an entry from the database of the local DNS server for type SRV DNS queries.
Setting parameters:
<Name>
String specifying the service name of the entry to be deleted
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries the entries of the local DNS server database for type SRV DNS queries.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
164
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
The four values listed below are returned for each database entry: {<Name>, <Url>,
<Protocol>, <Port>}entry 0, {...}entry 1, ...
Return values:
<Name>
String specifying the service name
<Url>
String specifying the URL of the domain
<Protocol>
UDP | TCP
<Port>
Range:
Example:
Usage:
Query only
0 to 65654
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:DOMain <Domain>
Specifies the domain to be resolved during a test of the foreign DNS server.
Parameters:
<Domain>
String specifying the URL of the domain

*RST:
Example:
'www.rohde-schwarz.com'
Manual operation:
See "Test Primary Foreign DNS Server (softkey)" on page 50
Starts a test of the foreign DNS server.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries the results of a foreign DNS server test.
NONE indicates that no result is available (e.g. no test started yet).
"Successful query" means that the domain could be resolved and the DNS server has
returned an IP address.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
165
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<V4SAvailable>
NONE | SUCCeded | FAILed

Indicates whether the server was reachable via its IPv4 address
<V4AResRec>

Indicates whether a query type A, sent to the IPv4 address was
successful
<V44AResRec>

Indicates whether a query type AAAA, sent to the IPv4 address
was successful
<V6SAvailable>

Indicates whether the server was reachable via its IPv6 address
<V6AResRec>

Indicates whether a query type A, sent to the IPv6 address was
successful
<V64AResRec>

Indicates whether a query type AAAA, sent to the IPv6 address
was successful
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:STATe <Control>
Starts or stops the local DNS server.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Switch the service ON or OFF
Return values:
<State>
OFF | ON | PENDing
OFF: service switched off
ON: service switched on
PEND: service activation or deactivation ongoing
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "DNS Server Control" on page 50
166
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
6.2.6 FTP Service

The following commands configure and start/stop the FTP service.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STYPe.......................................................................... 167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:ENConnection................................................................167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:IPVSix........................................................................... 167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:AUSer........................................................................... 168
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:DUPLoad.......................................................................168
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD.................................................................... 168
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:CATalog?.................................................................. 169
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:DELete................................................................ 169
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STATe.............................................................................. 170
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STYPe <ServiceType>
Selects the FTP service type.
The other CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:... commands configure the FTP
server. They are not relevant, if the service type TGENerator is selected.
Parameters:
<ServiceType>
SERVer | TGENerator
SERVer: an FTP server runs on the R&S CMW
TGENerator: the R&S CMW acts as a traffic generator
*RST:
Example:
SERV
See Configuring the FTP Service
Manual operation:
See "FTP Service Type" on page 51
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:ENConnection <ExtNetConn>
Specifies whether access to the FTP server is allowed from an external network (via
LAN DAU).
Parameters:
<ExtNetConn>
OFF | ON
OFF: not allowed
ON: allowed
*RST:
Example:
ON
Manual operation:
See "FTP Server Settings" on page 51
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:IPVSix <IPv6Enable>
Specifies whether the FTP server supports IPv6.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
167
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<IPv6Enable>
OFF | ON
OFF: IPv4 support only
ON: support of IPv4 and IPv6
*RST:
Example:
ON
V3.0.10: *RST value changed
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:AUSer <Anonymous>
Specifies whether access to the FTP server is allowed for anonymous users.
Parameters:
<Anonymous>
OFF | ON
OFF: not allowed
ON: allowed
*RST:
Example:
ON
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:DUPLoad <DataUpload>
Specifies whether data upload to the FTP server is allowed for anonymous users.
Parameters:
<DataUpload>
OFF | ON
OFF: not allowed
ON: allowed
*RST:
Example:
ON
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD <User>, <Password>,

<DeleteAllowed>, <DownloadAllowed>, <UploadAllowed>
Creates a new FTP user account.
Setting parameters:
<User>
User name as string
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
168
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<Password>
Password as string
<DeleteAllowed>
OFF | ON
<DownloadAllowed> OFF | ON
<UploadAllowed>
OFF | ON
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "FTP User Accounts" on page 52
Queries the existing FTP user accounts and their permissions.
The four values listed below are returned for each FTP user: {<User>, <DeleteAllowed>, <DownloadAllowed>, <UploadAllowed>}user 1, {...}user 2, ..., {...}user n.
Return values:
<User>
FTP user name as string
<DeleteAllowed>
OFF | ON
OFF: delete forbidden
ON: delete allowed
<DownloadAllowed> OFF | ON
OFF: download forbidden
ON: download allowed
<UploadAllowed>
OFF | ON
OFF: upload forbidden
ON: upload allowed
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:DELete <User>[, <Password>]

Deletes an FTP user account.
Setting parameters:
<User>
FTP user name as string
<Password>
Password of the FTP user as string - supported for backward

compatibility of the command, can be omitted
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
169
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Event
V3.0.10: <Password> now optional
Manual operation:
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STATe <Control>
Starts or stops the FTP service.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Return values:
<State>
OFF | ON | PENDing
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "Service Control" on page 52
6.2.7 HTTP Service

The following commands configure and start/stop the HTTP service.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:ENConnection..............................................................170
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:IPVSix.........................................................................171
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:STATe............................................................................ 171
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:ENConnection <ExtNetConn>
Specifies whether access to the internal web server is allowed from an external network (via LAN DAU).
Parameters:
<ExtNetConn>
OFF | ON
OFF: not allowed
ON: allowed
*RST:
Example:
ON
See Configuring the HTTP Service
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Hypertext Transfer Protocol" on page 52
170
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:IPVSix <IPv6Enable>
Specifies whether the internal web server supports IPv6.
Parameters:
<IPv6Enable>
OFF | ON
OFF: IPv4 support only
ON: support of IPv4 and IPv6
*RST:
Example:
ON
V3.0.10: *RST value changed
Manual operation:
See "Hypertext Transfer Protocol" on page 52
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:STATe <Control>
Starts or stops the HTTP service.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Return values:
<State>
OFF | ON | PENDing
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "Service Control" on page 52
6.2.8 IMS Service

The commands described in this section configure and control the IMS service, voice
over IMS calls and SMS over IMS.
Do not combine the described ...:IMS2:... commands with older ...:IMS:...
commands from software versions before 3.5.10. Scripts using only the old commands
are still supported.
Service Control and Information............................................................................172

Call Update, Call Release and Deregistration.......................................................175
General Settings................................................................................................... 178
P-CSCF Settings...................................................................................................180
Subscriber Settings............................................................................................... 184
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
171
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
6.2.8.1
Virtual Subscriber Settings....................................................................................189

Mobile-Terminating Calls...................................................................................... 196
Short Messages.................................................................................................... 200
Service Control and Information

The following commands control the IMS service and query status information.
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:STATe.............................................................................172
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:GINFo?..............................................................................172
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EVENts?............................................................................ 173
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:HISTory?........................................................................... 173
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:STATus?........................................................175
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:STATe <Control>
Starts or stops the IMS service and the IMS server.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Return values:
<State>
OFF | ON | PENDing
*RST:
Example:
OFF
See Configuring IMS Services
Manual operation:
See "Server Control" on page 54
Queries all entries of the "General IMS Info" area.
For each entry, three parameters are returned, from oldest to latest entry: {<Timestamp>, <InfoType>, <GenericInfo>}entry 1, {<Timestamp>, <InfoType>, <GenericInfo>}entry 2, ...
Return values:
<Timestamp>
Timestamp of the entry as string in the format "hh:mm:ss"
<InfoType>
NONE | INFO | WARNing | ERRor

Category of the entry
NONE means that no category is assigned. If no entry at all is
available, the answer is "",NONE,"".
<GenericInfo>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
Text string describing the event
172
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Entries" on page 55
Queries all entries of the event log.
For each entry, six parameters are returned: {<ID>, <Timestamps>, <Source>, <Destination>, <Type>, <State>}entry 1, {<ID>, ..., <State>}entry 2, ...
Return values:
<ID>
String identifying the event log entry

Use this ID to query event details via SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:
IMS2:HISTory?
<Timestamps>
Timestamp as string in the format "hh:mm:ss"
<Source>
Originating party as string
<Destination>
Terminating party as string
<Type>
AUDio | VIDeo | SMS | CALL

AUDio: established audio call
VIDeo: established video call
SMS: sent or received short message
CALL: call setup or released call
<State>
OK | NOK | PROGgres | RINGing | ESTablished | RELeased |

NONE | MEDiaupdate
Status of the call or message transfer
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Entries" on page 56
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:HISTory? <ID>
Queries details for a selected event log entry.
The returned sequence depends on the type of the entry:
For a short message entry, four values are returned:

<SMSTimestamps>, <SMSType>, <SMSEncoding>, <SMSText>
For a call entry, eight values are returned for each recorded state:
{<HistoryState>, <HistoryTimestamps>, <SignalingType>,
<AMRType>, <AMRAlignMode>, <AMRMode>, <VideoCodec>,
<VideoAttributes>}state 1, {...}state 2, ..., {...}state n
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
173
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
If a parameter is not relevant for a state, INV is returned for this parameter.
Query parameters:
<ID>
Return values:
<SMSTimestamps>
<SMSType>
String selecting the event log entry

To query IDs, see SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EVENts?
on page 173.
Timestamp of the message transfer as string in the format
"hh:mm:ss"
TGPP | TGPP2 | OGPP | OGPP2
TGPP: mobile-terminating message, 3GPP
TGPP2: mobile-terminating message, 3GPP2
OGPP: mobile-originating message, 3GPP
OGPP2: mobile-originating message, 3GPP2
<SMSEncoding>
GSM7 | GSM8 | UCS | ASCI | IAF5 | ISO

Encoding of the message
<SMSText>
Message text as string
<HistoryState>
PROGgres | RINGing | ESTablished | RELeased | NONE |

MEDiaupdate
Status of the call
<HistoryTimestamps> Timestamp of the call as string in the format "hh:mm:ss"

<SignalingType>
PRECondit | NOPRecondit | SIMPle | REQU100 |

REQuprecondi | WOTPrec183
Signaling type of the call
<AMRType>
NARRowband | WIDeband | EVS

Audio codec type of the call
<AMRAlignMode>
OCTetaligned | BANDwidtheff
AMR voice codec alignment mode of the call
<AMRMode>
Codec mode as string
<VideoCodec>
H263 | H264
Video codec of the video call
<VideoAttributes>
Video codec attributes of the video call
Example:
Usage:
Query only
V3.5.21: codec type EVS
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Query of event details" on page 57
174
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:STATus?
Queries the state of a subscriber.
Suffix:
<UE>
Return values:
<Status>
.
1..5
Profile number of the subscriber to be queried
UNRegistered | REGistered | EXPired
Mobile unregistered, registered or registration expired
Usage:
Query only
6.2.8.2
Call Update, Call Release and Deregistration

The following commands perform a call update (modify settings of an established call),
release calls and deregister a mobile.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID...........................................................175
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:TYPE...................................................... 175
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:ALIGnment...............................................176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle.......................176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:CODec...................................................176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:ATTRibutes............................................ 177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:TYPE......................................................177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:PERForm.........................................................177
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:LIST?.................................................................. 177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID.........................................................178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:DERegister............................................... 178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID <ID>
Selects the call that shall be updated. To query a list of IDs, see CONFigure:DATA:
CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID on page 178.
All other UPDate commands affect the call selected via this command.
Parameters:
<ID>
Call ID as string, selecting the call to be updated
Example:
Manual operation:
See "Update Call (softkey)" on page 54
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:TYPE <AudioCodec>
Selects the new audio codec type for a call update: AMR NB, AMR WB or EVS.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
175
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<AudioCodec>

*RST:
Example:
NARR
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:ALIGnment <AMRAlignment>
Selects the new AMR voice codec alignment mode for a call update.
Parameters:
<AMRAlignment>
OCTetaligned: octet-aligned
BANDwidtheff: bandwidth-efficient
Example:
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle
<CodecRate>
Enables or disables an AMR codec rate for a call update.
Suffix:
<CodecIdx>
Parameters:
<CodecRate>
.
1..9
Selects the codec rate via its index.
OFF | ON
OFF: codec rate not supported
ON: codec rate supported
Example:
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:CODec <VideoCodec>
Selects the video codec for a call update.
Parameters:
<VideoCodec>
H263 | H264
H.263 or H.264 codec
*RST:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
H263
176
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Example:
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:ATTRibutes <VideoAttributes>
Configures video codec attributes for a call update.
Parameters:
<VideoAttributes>
Codec attributes as string
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:TYPE <CallType>
Selects the new call type for a call update.
Parameters:
<CallType>
AUDio | VIDeo
Example:
Manual operation:
Initiates the call update.
The settings configured via the UPDate commands are applied to the call selected via
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID on page 175.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries the IDs of all established calls.
Return values:
<Ids>
Comma-separated list of ID strings, one string per established

call
Example:
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
177
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Release Call (softkey)" on page 55
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID <ID>
Queries a list of call IDs or releases a call selected via its ID.
Setting parameters:
<ID>
ID as string, selecting the call to be released
Return values:
<IDs>
Example:
Comma-separated list of ID strings, one string per established

call
Manual operation:
See "Release Call (softkey)" on page 55
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:DERegister
Deregisters a registered subscriber from the IMS server.
Suffix:
<UE>
.
1..5
Profile number of the subscriber to be deregistered
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
6.2.8.3
See "Deregister Mobile (softkey)" on page 55
General Settings
The following commands configure basic IMS service settings.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage....................................................................... 178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:SELection....................................................179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:THReshold:VALue........................................................ 179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVFour..................................179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVSix....................................180
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage <ServerUsage>
Selects whether the internal IMS server of the DAU or an external IMS network shall
be used for IMS services.
Parameters:
<ServerUsage>
INTernal | EXTernal
*RST:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
INT (if allowed)
178
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Example:
Options:
R&S CMW-KAA20 required for internal IMS server
Manual operation:
See "Use IMS Server as" on page 58
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:SELection <Transport Selection>

Configures whether TCP or UDP is used by the internal IMS server.
Parameters:
<Transport Selection>DEFault | TCP | UDP | CUSTom
DEFault: Fixed threshold, UDP for short messages, TCP for
long messages
TCP: Only TCP is used
UDP: Only UDP is used
CUSTom: UDP for short messages, TCP for long messages,
threshold configurable via CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:
THReshold:VALue
*RST:
Example:
UDP
Manual operation:
See "Transport Selection, UDP/TCP Threshold" on page 58
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:THReshold:VALue <Threshold Value>

Configures a threshold for the usage of UDP (below threshold) and TCP (above
threshold).
The setting is only relevant for CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:
SELection CUSTom.
Parameters:
<Threshold Value>
Number of characters per SIP message

Range:
*RST:
Example:
1 to 65535
1
Manual operation:
See "Transport Selection, UDP/TCP Threshold" on page 58
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVFour <IPv4Addr>
Specifies the IPv4 address of an external P-CSCF.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
179
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<IPv4Addr>
IPv4 address string

*RST:
Example:
'192.168.168.200'
Manual operation:
See "P-CSCF IPv4/IPv6 Address" on page 58
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVSix <IPv6Addr>
Specifies the IPv6 address of an external P-CSCF.
Parameters:
<IPv6Addr>
IPv6 address string

*RST:
Example:
'fcb1:cafe::200'
Manual operation:
6.2.8.4
See "P-CSCF IPv4/IPv6 Address" on page 58
P-CSCF Settings
The following commands configure the simulated P-CSCFs.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:ADD..................................................................180
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:DELete........................................................ 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:IPADdress................................................... 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:BEHaviour................................................... 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:FAILurecode................................................ 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:RETRyafter.................................................. 182
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:REGexp.......................................................182
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:SUBexp....................................................... 183
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CREate............................................................. 183
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CATalog?................................................................184
Creates a new P-CSCF profile.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Options:
R&S CMW-KAA21
Manual operation:
See "Add / Delete Tab" on page 59
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
180
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:DELete
Deletes the P-CSCF profile number .
Suffix:

.
3..10
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:IPADdress <IPAddress>
Defines the IP address of the P-CSCF number .
Suffix:

Parameters:
<IPAddress>
Example:
.
1..10
IPv4 or IPv6 address string
Example: '172.22.1.201' or 'fc01:cafe::1/64'
Manual operation:
See "IP Address" on page 59
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:BEHaviour <Behaviour>
Defines the behavior of the P-CSCF number when it receives a SIP message from
the mobile.
Suffix:

.
1..10
Parameters:
<Behaviour>
NORMal | FAILure
NORMal: normal behavior
FAILure: return failure code
*RST:
Example:
NORM
Manual operation:
See "Behavior" on page 60
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:FAILurecode <FailureCode>
Defines a failure code for the P-CSCF number , behavior = FAIL.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
181
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:

Parameters:
<FailureCode>
.
1..10
BADRequest | FORBidden | NOTFound | INTerror |
UNAVailable | BUSYeveryw
BADRequest: 400 Bad Request
FORBidden: 403 Forbidden
NOTFound: 404 Not Found
INTerror: 500 Server Internal Error
UNAVailable: 503 Service Unavailable
BUSYeveryw: 600 Busy Everywhere
*RST:
Example:
BADR
Manual operation:
See "Failure" on page 60
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:RETRyafter <RetryAfter>
Defines the contents of the "Retry After" header field for the P-CSCF number ,
behavior = FAIL.
Suffix:

Parameters:
<RetryAfter>
Example:
.
1..10
*RST:
0s
Default unit: s
Manual operation:
See "Failure" on page 60
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:REGexp <RegExpMin>,
<RegExpDefault>, <RegExpMax>
Defines registration expiration times for the P-CSCF number .
Suffix:

.
1..10
Parameters:
<RegExpMin>
Minimum acceptable expiration time

*RST:
1s
Default unit: s
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
182
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<RegExpDefault>
Default value, used if the mobile does not suggest an expiration

time
*RST:
3600 s
Default unit: s
<RegExpMax>
Maximum acceptable expiration time

*RST:
600E+3 s
Default unit: s
Example:
Manual operation:
See "Registration" on page 60
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:SUBexp <SubsExpMin>,
<SubsExpDefault>, <SubsExpMax>
Defines subscription expiration times for the P-CSCF number .
Suffix:

.
1..10
Parameters:
<SubsExpMin>
Minimum acceptable expiration time

*RST:
1s
Default unit: s
<SubsExpDefault>
Default value, used if the mobile does not suggest an expiration

time
*RST:
3600 s
Default unit: s
<SubsExpMax>
Maximum acceptable expiration time

*RST:
600E+3 s
Default unit: s
Example:
Manual operation:
See "Subscription" on page 60
Updates the internal list of P-CSCF profiles.
If your command script modifies any P-CSCF settings, you must insert this command
before you can use the modified profiles, for example for registration.
It is sufficient to insert the command once, after the last P-CSCF configuration command / before the profiles are used.
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
183
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "OK (button)" on page 60
Queries a list of all P-CSCF profile names.
Return values:
<Catalog>
String listing all profile names, separated by commas

String example: "P-CSCF 1,P-CSCF 2"
Example:
See Configuring P-CSCF profiles
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.2.8.5
Subscriber Settings
The following commands configure subscriber profiles for the tested mobiles.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:ADD...........................................................184
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:DELete................................................. 185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PRIVateid............................................. 185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:SCHeme........................... 185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:ALGorithm.........................186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:KEY..................................186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:AMF................................. 186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:OPC................................. 187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:RESLength............................................187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ENABle....................................... 187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:INTegrity..................... 188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:ENCRyption................ 188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PUBLicuserid<Index>.............................188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CREate...................................................... 189
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CATalog?.........................................................189
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:ADD
Creates a new subscriber profile.
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
184
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:DELete
Deletes the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
2..5
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PRIVateid <PrivateId>
Specifies the private user ID of the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<PrivateId>
Private user ID as string

*RST:
Example:
'[email protected]'
Manual operation:
See "Private User ID" on page 62
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:SCHeme
<AuthScheme>
Specifies whether authentication shall be performed for the subscriber profile number
<s> and selects the authentication and key agreement version to be used.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<AuthScheme>
AKA1 | AKA2 | NOAuthentic

AKA1: authentication with AKA version 1
AKA2: authentication with AKA version 2
NOAuthentic: no authentication
*RST:
Example:
NOA
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Authentication" on page 62
185
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:ALGorithm
<AuthKeyGenAlg>
Specifies which algorithm set is used for the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<AuthKeyGenAlg>
XOR | MILenage
*RST:
Example:
MIL
Manual operation:
See "Key Generation Algorithm" on page 62
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:KEY <AuthKey>
Defines the authentication key K for the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<AuthKey>
Key as string (32-digit hexadecimal number)

*RST:
Example:
'0x000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f'
Manual operation:
See "Key" on page 63
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:AMF <AuthAmf>
Specifies the Authentication Management Field (AMF) for the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<AuthAmf>
AMF as string (4-digit hexadecimal number)

*RST:
Example:
'0x0000'
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "AMF" on page 63
186
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:OPC <AuthOPc>
Specifies the key OPc for the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<AuthOPc>
Key as string (32-digit hexadecimal number)

*RST:
Example:
'0xcb9dcdc5b9258e6dca4760379fb82581'
Manual operation:
See "OPc" on page 63
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:RESLength <ResLength>
Specifies the length of the authentication response for the subscriber profile number
<s>.
Suffix:
<s>
Parameters:
<ResLength>
Example:
.
1..5
Range:
32 bit to 128 bit
*RST:
32 bit
Default unit: bit
Manual operation:
See "RES Length" on page 63
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ENABle <IPSec>
Enables or disables support of the IP security mechanisms by the IMS server for subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<IPSec>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "IPSec" on page 63
187
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:INTegrity
<IntegrityAlg>
Selects an integrity protection algorithm for subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<IntegrityAlg>
HMMD | HMSH
HMMD: HMAC-MD5-96
HMSH: HMAC-SHA-1-96
*RST:
Example:
HMSH
Manual operation:
See "Integrity Algorithm" on page 63
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:ENCRyption
<EncryptionAlg>
Selects an encryption algorithm for subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
Parameters:
<EncryptionAlg>
DES | AES | NOC

DES: DES-EDE3-CBC
AES: AES-CBC
NOC: NULL, no encryption
*RST:
Example:
NOC
Manual operation:
See "Encryption Algorithm" on page 64
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PUBLicuserid<Index>
<PublicUserIds>
Defines public user ID number <Index> for the subscriber profile number <s>.
Suffix:
<s>
.
1..5
<Index>
1..10
Parameters:
<PublicUserIds>
Public user ID as string
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
188
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Public User IDs" on page 64
Updates the internal list of subscriber profiles.
If your command script modifies any subscriber settings, you must insert this command
before you can use the modified profiles, for example for registration.
It is sufficient to insert the command once, after the last subscriber configuration command / before the profiles are used.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries a list of all subscriber profile names.
Return values:
<Catalog>

String example: "Subscriber 1,Subscriber 2"
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.2.8.6
Virtual Subscriber Settings

The following commands configure virtual subscriber profiles.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:ADD...........................................................190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:DELete................................................. 190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:ID.........................................................190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEHaviour.............................................190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:SIGNalingtyp......................................... 191
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEARer................................................ 191
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:TYPE............................................192
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:ALIGnment....................................192
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle............193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:CODec........................................193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:ATTRibutes................................. 193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MEDiaendpoin.......................................194
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:FORWard............................................. 194
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
189
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AUDioboard.......................................... 195
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CREate...................................................... 195
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CATalog?.........................................................195
Creates a new virtual subscriber profile.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:DELete
Deletes the virtual subscriber profile number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
2..20
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:ID <ID>
Specifies the public user ID of the virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<ID>
Public user ID as string
Example:
Manual operation:
See "Public User ID" on page 66
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEHaviour <Behaviour>
Defines the reaction of virtual subscriber number <v> to incoming calls.
Suffix:
<v>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
.
1..20
190
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<Behaviour>
ANSWer | NOANswer | DECLined | BUSY

ANSWer: answer the call
NOANswer: keep "ringing"
DECLined: reject call
BUSY: subscriber busy
*RST:
Example:
ANSW
Manual operation:
See "Behavior" on page 66
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:SIGNalingtyp <SigType>
Specifies whether a voice call session with virtual subscriber number <v> is established with or without quality of service preconditions.
Suffix:
<v>
Parameters:
<SigType>
.
1..20
PRECondit
With preconditions
NOPRecondit
Without preconditions
SIMPle
Simplified call flow, without preconditions
REQU100
Require 100rel, without preconditions
REQuprecondi
Require precondition, with preconditions
WOTPrec183
With 183, without preconditions
*RST:
Example:
NOPR
V3.5.21: REQU100, REQuprecondi, WOTPrec183
Manual operation:
See "Signaling Type" on page 66
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEARer <Bearer>
Enables the automatic setup of a dedicated bearer for calls of virtual subscriber number <v>.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
191
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Bearer>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "Dedicated Bearer" on page 67
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:TYPE <Type>
Selects the audio codec type for voice over IMS calls with virtual subscriber number
<v>: AMR NB, AMR WB or EVS.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Type>

*RST:
Example:
NARR
Manual operation:
See "Codec" on page 67
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:ALIGnment <AlignMode>
Selects the AMR voice codec alignment mode for voice over IMS calls with virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<AlignMode>
*RST:
Example:
OCT
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "AMR Alignment Mode" on page 68
192
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:
ENABle <CodecRate>
Enables or disables a codec rate for the currently active AMR type of virtual subscriber
number <v>, see CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:
ALIGnment.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
<CodecIdx>
1..9
Parameters:
<CodecRate>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "Codec Rates" on page 68
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:CODec <Codec>
Selects the codec for video calls of virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Codec>
H263 | H264
*RST:
Example:
H263
Manual operation:
See "Video" on page 70
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:ATTRibutes <Attributes>
Configures codec attributes for video calls of virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Attributes>
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
193
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Video" on page 70
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MEDiaendpoin <MediaEndpoint>
Configures the media endpoint for virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<MediaEndpoint>
LOOPback | FORWard | AUDioboard

LOOPback: Loop back to the mobile
FORWard: Route to an external media endpoint
AUDioboard: Route to the speech codec of the audio board
*RST:
Example:
LOOP
Manual operation:
See "Media Endpoint" on page 70
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:FORWard <IPAddress>, <Port>,

<CmdPort>, <AMRAlign>
Configures an external media endpoint for virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
IPv4 or IPv6 address of the media endpoint as string

*RST:
<Port>
Port for RTP packet forwarding

*RST:
<CmdPort>
1000
Port for the command interface to the media endpoint

*RST:
<AMRAlign>
'172.22.2.2'
1000
AMR alignment mode used by the media endpoint
*RST:
BAND
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "IP" on page 70
194
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AUDioboard <Instance>,
<DTXEnable>, <ForceModeNB>, <ForceModeWB>
Configures the audio board for virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Instance>
INST1
For future use
*RST:
<DTXEnable>
INST1
OFF | ON
Enable comfort noise in the downlink
*RST:
<ForceModeNB>
OFF
ZERO | ONE | TWO | THRE | FOUR | FIVE | SIX | SEVN | FREE

Index of the AMR narrowband codec rate to be used
FREE means that no specific codec rate is forced
*RST:
<ForceModeWB>
FREE
ZERO | ONE | TWO | THRE | FOUR | FIVE | SIX | SEVN |

EIGH | FREE
Index of the AMR wideband codec rate to be used
*RST:
Example:
FREE
Manual operation:
See "Enable DTX in DL" on page 71
Updates the internal list of virtual subscriber profiles.
If your command script modifies any virtual subscriber settings, you must insert this
command before you can use the modified profiles, for example for call setup.
It is sufficient to insert the command once, after the last virtual subscriber configuration
command / before the profiles are used.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
Queries a list of all virtual subscriber profile names.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
195
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<Catalog>

String example: "Virtual 1,Virtual 2"
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.2.8.7
Mobile-Terminating Calls
The following commands configure and control mobile-terminating voice over IMS
calls.
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination:LIST?........................... 196
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination...............................196
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:TYPE........................................ 197
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:SIGType.................................... 197
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:BEARer..................................... 198
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:TYPE................................ 198
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:ALIGnment........................ 199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:
ENABle...............................................................................................................199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:CODec............................ 199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:ATTRibutes...................... 200
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:CALL.........................................200
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination:LIST?
Queries a list of all possible destination strings for mobile-terminating calls.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Return values:
<Destinations>
Comma-separated list of strings, one per destination
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Destination" on page 73
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination
<Destination>
Specifies the destination to be called by virtual subscriber number <v>.
To query a list of all possible destination strings, see SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:
VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination:LIST? on page 196.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
196
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Destination>
Destination string
Example:
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:TYPE <Type>
Selects the type of call to be initiated by virtual subscriber <v>: audio call or video call.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Type>
AUDio | VIDeo
*RST:
Example:
AUD
Manual operation:
See "Call Type" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:SIGType <SigType>
Specifies whether a mobile-terminating call from virtual subscriber number <v> is
established with or without quality of service preconditions.
Suffix:
<v>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
.
1..20
197
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<SigType>

PRECondit
With preconditions
NOPRecondit
Without preconditions
SIMPle
Simplified call flow, without preconditions
REQU100
Require 100rel, without preconditions
REQuprecondi
Require precondition, with preconditions
WOTPrec183
With 183, without preconditions
*RST:
NOPR
V3.5.21: REQU100, REQuprecondi, WOTPrec183
Manual operation:
See "Signaling Type" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:BEARer <Bearer>
Enables the automatic setup of a dedicated bearer, if a voice over IMS call is established for virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Bearer>
OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "Dedicated Bearer" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:TYPE <Type>
Selects the audio codec type for mobile-terminating calls from virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Type>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
198
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Audio Codec" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:ALIGnment
<AlignmentMode>
Selects the AMR voice codec alignment mode for mobile-terminating calls from virtual
subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<AlignmentMode>
*RST:
OCT
Manual operation:
See "AMR Settings" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:
CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle <CodecRate>
Enables or disables a codec rate for mobile-terminating calls from virtual subscriber
number <v>.
The rate applies to the currently active AMR type, see CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:
IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:TYPE.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
<CodecIdx>
1..9
Parameters:
<CodecRate>
OFF | ON
*RST:
OFF
Manual operation:
See "AMR Settings" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:CODec <Codec>
Selects the codec for mobile-terminating video calls of virtual subscriber number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
.
1..20
199
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<Codec>
H263 | H264
*RST:
H263
Manual operation:
See "Video Codec, Video Attributes" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:ATTRibutes
<Attributes>
Configures codec attributes for mobile-terminating video calls of virtual subscriber
number <v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Attributes>
Manual operation:
See "Video Codec, Video Attributes" on page 74
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:CALL
Initiates the setup of a voice over IMS call, from virtual subscriber number <v> to the
mobile.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
6.2.8.8
See "Call (button)" on page 74
Short Messages
The following commands configure and control mobile-terminating short messages.
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST?.......................... 200
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination..............................201
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TYPE........................................201
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TEXT........................................202
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:SEND....................................... 202
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST?
Queries a list of all possible destination strings for mobile-terminating short messages.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
200
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Return values:
<Destinations>
Comma-separated list of strings, one per destination
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination
<Destination>
Specifies the destination to which short messages shall be sent by virtual subscriber
number <v>.
To query a list of all possible destination strings, see SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:
VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST? on page 200.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Destination>
Destination string
Example:
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TYPE <Type>
Selects the message type for short messages to be sent by virtual subscriber number
<v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Type>
GPP | GPP2 | ACK

GPP: 3GPP
GPP2: 3GPP2 without delivery ACK
ACK: 3GPP2 with delivery ACK
*RST:
Example:
GPP
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "SMS Type" on page 76
201
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TEXT <Text>
Defines the message text for short messages to be sent by virtual subscriber number
<v>.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Parameters:
<Text>
Message text as string

*RST:
Example:
"R&S Short Message Service Text. The quick

brown fox jumps over the lazy dog. THE QUICK
BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG.
0123456789 !"#\*%+-/()<>?=;@$,"
Manual operation:
See "Text" on page 76
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:SEND
Initiates a short message transfer from virtual subscriber number <v> to the mobile.
Suffix:
<v>
.
1..20
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Send (button)" on page 76
6.2.9 ePDG Service

The commands described in this section configure and control the ePDG service.
6.2.9.1
Service Control and Information............................................................................202

ePDG IP and ID Settings...................................................................................... 203
IKE Settings.......................................................................................................... 204
ESP Settings.........................................................................................................206
P-CSCF IKEv2 Attributes...................................................................................... 207
Authentication Settings......................................................................................... 208
Dead Peer Detection Settings...............................................................................210
Certificate Settings................................................................................................ 211
Service Control and Information

The following commands control the ePDG service and query status information.
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CONNections:IMSI?.......................................................... 203
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
202
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CONNections:IMSI?
Queries all IMSIs for which ePDG connections are established.
Return values:
<IMSI>
Usage:
Comma-separated list of ten values

Each IMSI is returned as a string value. The remaining values
are filled with INV.
Query only
6.2.9.2
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Connection information" on page 78
ePDG IP and ID Settings

The following commands configure the address and ID of the ePDG.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVFour.......................................................203
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVSix.........................................................203
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:TYPE..................................................................... 204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:VALue....................................................................204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVFour <IPv4Address>
Specifies the IPv4 address of the ePDG.
Parameters:
<IPv4Address>
IPv4 address string

*RST:
Example:
'192.168.1.201'
See Configuring the ePDG Service
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "ePDG IP Configuration" on page 79
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVSix <IPv6Address>
Specifies the IPv6 address of the ePDG.
Parameters:
<IPv6Address>
IPv6 address string

*RST:
Example:
'fc01::1'
Options:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&S CMW-KA065
203
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "ePDG IP Configuration" on page 79
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:TYPE <IDType>
Configures the type of the ePDG identification.
Parameters:
<IDType>
IPVF | FQDN | RFC | IPVS | KEY

IPVF: ID_IPv4_ADDR
FQDN: ID_FQDN
RFC: ID_RFC822_ADDR
IPVS: ID_IPV6_ADDR
KEY: ID_KEY_ID
*RST:
Example:
FQDN
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "ePDG ID Configuration" on page 79
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:VALue <IDValue>
Configures the value of the ePDG identification.
Parameters:
<IDValue>
Identification as string
*RST:
Example:
'Epdg.rs.org'
6.2.9.3
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "ePDG ID Configuration" on page 79
IKE Settings
The following commands configure settings for the IKEv2 protocol.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:ENCRyption..........................................................204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:PRF..................................................................... 205
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:INTegrity.............................................................. 205
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:DHGRoup.............................................................206
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:ENCRyption <AESCBC>
Selects the supported encryption algorithms for the IKEv2 protocol.
Currently, only "ENCR_AES_CBC" (CBC) is possible.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
204
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<AESCBC>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Encryption" on page 80
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:PRF <PRFMD5>, <PRFSHA1>

Selects the supported pseudorandom functions for the IKEv2 protocol.
Parameters:
<PRFMD5>
OFF | ON
PRF_HMAC_MD5
*RST:
<PRFSHA1>
OFF
OFF | ON
PRF_HMAC_SHA1
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "PRF" on page 80
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:INTegrity <HMAC_MD5_96>,
<HMAC_SHAI_96>, <AES_XCB_96>
Selects the supported integrity protection algorithms for the IKEv2 protocol.
Parameters:
<HMAC_MD5_96>
OFF | ON
AUTH_HMAC_MD5_96
*RST:
<HMAC_SHAI_96>
OFF
OFF | ON
AUTH_HMAC_SHA1_96
*RST:
<AES_XCB_96>
OFF
OFF | ON
AUTH_AES_XCBC_96
*RST:
Example:
OFF
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
205
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Integrity" on page 81
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:DHGRoup <DHGroup1>, <DHGroup2>,

<DHGroup5>, <DHGroup14>
Selects the supported Diffie-Hellman groups for the IKEv2 protocol.
Parameters:
<DHGroup1>
OFF | ON
*RST:
<DHGroup2>
OFF | ON
*RST:
<DHGroup5>
OFF
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
OFF | ON
*RST:
<DHGroup14>
OFF
OFF
6.2.9.4
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Diffie Hellman" on page 81
ESP Settings
The following commands configure settings for the ESP protocol.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:ENCRyption........................................................ 206
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:INTegrity............................................................. 207
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:ENCRyption <AESCBC>
Selects the supported encryption algorithms for the ESP protocol.
Currently, only "ENCR_AES_CBC" (CBC) is supported.
Parameters:
<AESCBC>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Encryption" on page 81
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
206
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:INTegrity <MD596>, <SHAI96>, <XCBC96>

Selects the supported integrity protection algorithms for the ESP protocol.
Parameters:
<MD596>
OFF | ON
AUTH_HMAC_MD5_96
*RST:
<SHAI96>
OFF
OFF | ON
AUTH_HMAC_SHA1_96
*RST:
<XCBC96>
OFF
OFF | ON
AUTH_AES_XCBC_96
*RST:
Example:
OFF
6.2.9.5
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Integrity" on page 82
P-CSCF IKEv2 Attributes

The following commands configure settings related to the transport of P-CSCF
addresses via IKEv2.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVFour:TYPE..................................................207
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:TYPE....................................................207
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:ADDRess:LENGth..................................208
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVFour:TYPE <PCSCFIPV4TYP>
Sets the attribute type field of the P_CSCF_IP4_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
Parameters:
<PCSCFIPV4TYP>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
20
Manual operation:
See "IPv4 Type" on page 82
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:TYPE <PCSCFIPV6TYP>
Sets the attribute type field of the P_CSCF_IP6_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
207
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<PCSCFIPV6TYP>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
21
Manual operation:
See "IPv6 Type" on page 82
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:ADDRess:LENGth
<IPVSixADDLGH>
Sets the length field of the P_CSCF_IP6_ADDRESS configuration attribute.
Parameters:
<IPVSixADDLGH>
L16 | L17
*RST:
Example:
L16
Manual operation:
6.2.9.6
See "IPv6 Address Length" on page 82
Authentication Settings
The following commands configure settings for the authentication procedure.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:IMSI.......................................................... 208
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:ALGorithm..................................................209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY...........................................................209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:RAND........................................................ 209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:AMF.......................................................... 209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY:TYPE................................................. 210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:OPC.......................................................... 210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:IMSI <AuthIMSI>
Specifies the IMSI of the SIM card.
Parameters:
<AuthIMSI>
String value, containing 15 digits

*RST:
Example:
'001010123456789'
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "IMSI" on page 83
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
208
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:ALGorithm <AuthAlg>
Specifies the key generation algorithm set used by the SIM.
Parameters:
<AuthAlg>
XOR | MILenage
*RST:
Example:
XOR
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Authentication Algorithm" on page 83
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY <AuthKey>
Defines the secret key K as 32-digit hexadecimal number. Leading zeros may be omitted.
Parameters:
<AuthKey>
Range:
*RST:
Example:
#H0 to
#HFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
#H000102030405060708090A0B0C0D0E0F
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Secret Key" on page 83
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:RAND <AuthRAND>
Defines the random number RAND as 32-digit hexadecimal number. Leading zeros
may be omitted.
Parameters:
<AuthRAND>
Range:
*RST:
Example:
#H0 to
#H55555555555555555555555555555555
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "RAND" on page 83
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:AMF <AuthAMF>
Specifies the Authentication Management Field (AMF) as 4-digit hexadecimal number.
Leading zeros may be omitted.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
209
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<AuthAMF>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
#H0 to #HFFFF
#H0000
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "AMF" on page 83
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY:TYPE <AuthKeyType>
Selects the key type to be used with the MILENAGE algorithm set.
Currently, only OPc is supported.
Parameters:
<AuthKeyType>
OPC
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Key Type" on page 83
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:OPC <AuthOPC>
Specifies the key OPc as 32-digit hexadecimal number. Leading zeros may be omitted.
Parameters:
<AuthOPC>
Range:
*RST:
Example:
#H00000000000000000000000000000000 to
#HCD63CB71954A9F4E48A5994E37A02BAF
6.2.9.7
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Authentication OPc" on page 84
Dead Peer Detection Settings

The following commands configure settings for dead peer detection.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:ENABle...............................................................210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:INTerval..............................................................211
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:TIMeout.............................................................. 211
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:ENABle <DPDENABLE>
Enables dead peer detection.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
210
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<DPDENABLE>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Enable" on page 84
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:INTerval <DPDInterval>
Configures the inactivity time interval for dead peer detection.
Parameters:
<DPDInterval>
Example:
Range:
1 s to 100 s
*RST:
1s
Default unit: s
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Interval, Timeout" on page 84
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:TIMeout <DPDTimeout>
Configures the no answer timeout for dead peer detection.
Parameters:
<DPDTimeout>
Example:
Range:
1 s to 10E+3 s
*RST:
10 s
Default unit: s
6.2.9.8
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Interval, Timeout" on page 84
Certificate Settings
The following commands configure settings related to SSL certificates.
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:ENABle.................................................... 212
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:KEY......................................................... 212
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:CERTificate.............................................. 212
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
211
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:ENABle <CertificateEnable>
Enables the usage of certificates for SSL.
Parameters:
<CertificateEnable>
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Enable" on page 85
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:KEY <CertificateKeyFile>
Selects the server key file to be used for SSL.
Parameters:
<CertificateKeyFile> Filename as string, without path
Example:
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Server Key, Server Certificate" on page 85
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:CERTificate <CertificateFile>
Selects the server certificate file to be used for SSL.
Parameters:
<CertificateFile>
Filename as string, without path
Example:
Options:
R&S CMW-KA065
Manual operation:
See "Server Key, Server Certificate" on page 85

The commands for the "Data Application Measurements" are divided into the groups
listed below.
RAN Selection.......................................................................................................213
Ping Measurement................................................................................................ 213
IPerf Measurement................................................................................................218
Throughput Measurement.....................................................................................227
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
212
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
DNS Requests Measurement............................................................................... 232

IP Logging.............................................................................................................235
IP Analysis............................................................................................................ 239
IP Replay...............................................................................................................258
Audio Delay Measurement....................................................................................264
Network Impairments............................................................................................ 269
6.3.1 RAN Selection

The following commands select a Radio Access Network (RAN).
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN.................................................................................... 213
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?...................................................................213
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN <RAN>
Selects an installed signaling application instance. A complete list of all supported values can be displayed using CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?.
Parameters:
<RAN>
String parameter, e.g. "LTE Sig1"
Example:
See Configuring Global Settings
Manual operation:
See "Select RAN" on page 87
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?
Lists all signaling applications that can be selected using CONFigure:DATA:
MEAS:RAN.
Return values:
<RAN>
Comma separated list of all supported values. Each value is represented as a string.
Example:
See Configuring Global Settings
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Select RAN" on page 87
6.3.2 Ping Measurement

The commands in this section are related to the ping measurement. They configure the
measurement, control it and return the current measurement state and the measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
213
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:DIPaddress................................................................. 214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:INTerval......................................................................214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:TIMeout...................................................................... 214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PSIZe......................................................................... 215
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PCOunt.......................................................................215
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:PING........................................................................................ 215
STOP:DATA:MEAS:PING.......................................................................................... 215
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:PING......................................................................................... 215
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe?............................................................................ 216
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe:ALL?......................................................................216
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING?....................................................................................... 217
READ:DATA:MEAS:PING?.........................................................................................217
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:OVERall?.......................................................................... 218
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:NRCount?......................................................................... 218
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:DIPaddress <IPAddress>
Specifies the destination IP address for the ping command.
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
IPv4 or IPv6 address as string

*RST:
Example:
'172.22.1.100'
See Performing a Ping Measurement
Manual operation:
See "Config" on page 90
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:INTerval <Interval>
Specifies the interval between two ping requests.
Parameters:
<Interval>
Example:
Range:
0.2 s to 10 s
*RST:
1s
Default unit: s
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:TIMeout <Timeout>
Specifies a timeout for ping requests.
Parameters:
<Timeout>
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
Range:
1 s to 9 s
*RST:
2s
Default unit: s
214
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PSIZe <PacketSize>
Specifies the payload size of echo request packets.
Parameters:
<PacketSize>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
100 byte
Default unit: byte
V3.0.10: range and *RST value changed
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PCOunt <PingCount>
Specifies the number of echo request packets to be sent.
Parameters:
<PingCount>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
1 to 1000
100
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:PING
STOP:DATA:MEAS:PING
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:PING
Starts, stops, or aborts the measurement:
INITiate... starts or restarts the measurement. The measurement enters the

"RUN" state.
STOP... halts the measurement immediately. The measurement enters the "RDY"
state. Measurement results are kept. Allocated resources remain allocated to the
measurement.
ABORt... halts the measurement immediately. The measurement enters the

"OFF" state. All measurement values are set to NAV. Allocated resources are
released.
Use FETCh...STATe? to query the current measurement state.

See also: "Measurement Control" in the R&S CMW user manual, chapter "Remote
Control"
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
215
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Measurement Control" on page 90
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe?
Queries the main measurement state. Use FETCh:...:STATe:ALL? to query the
measurement state including the substates. Use INITiate..., STOP...,
ABORt... to change the measurement state.
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

OFF: measurement switched off, no resources allocated, no
results available (when entered after ABORt...)
RUN: measurement running (after INITiate..., READ...),
synchronization pending or adjusted, resources active or queued
RDY: measurement has been terminated, valid results may be
available
*RST:
OFF
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe:ALL?
Queries the main measurement state and the measurement substates. Both measurement substates are relevant for running measurements only. Use
FETCh:...:STATe? to query the main measurement state only. Use INITiate...,
STOP..., ABORt... to change the measurement state.
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

results available (when entered after STOP...)
available
*RST:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
OFF
216
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<SyncState>
PEND | ADJ | INV

PEND: waiting for resource allocation, adjustment, hardware
switching ("pending")
ADJ: all necessary adjustments finished, measurement running
("adjusted")
INV: not applicable because <MainState>: OFF or RDY ("invalid")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

QUE: measurement without resources, no results available
("queued")
ACT: resources allocated, acquisition of results in progress but
not complete ("active")
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING?
READ:DATA:MEAS:PING?
Queries the measured ping characteristics.
After the reliability indicator, three results are returned for each ping request:
<Reliability>, {<ReqNo>, <Timestamp>, <Latency>}request 1, {...}request 2, ...
The number of ping requests is specified by CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:
PCOunt.
Return values:
<Reliability>
see Reliability Indicator
<ReqNo>
Request label, 0 = last request, -1 = previous request and so on

Range:
-1000 to 0
<Timestamp>
Timestamp as string in the format 'hh:mm:ss'
<Latency>
Round-trip time for sent packets (0 s = no reply)

Range:
0 s to 10 s
Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
V3.0.10: latency unit changed from ms to s
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Result Diagram" on page 89
217
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:OVERall?
Query the statistical ping results over all ping requests.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<MinPing>
Minimum ping latency

Range:
0 s to 10 s
Default unit: s
<MaxPing>
Maximum ping latency

Range:
0 s to 10 s
Default unit: s
<AveragePing>
Average ping latency

Range:
0 s to 10 s
Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Average / Minimum / Maximum" on page 89
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:NRCount?
Queries the number of ping requests that have not been answered (no reply).
Return values:
<ReqNo>
Range:
Example:
Usage:
Query only
0 to 1000
Manual operation:
See "'No Reply' Count" on page 89
6.3.3 IPerf Measurement

The commands in this section are related to the IP performance measurement. They
configure the measurement, control it and return the current measurement state and
the measurement results.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:TDURation................................................................. 219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:PSIZe........................................................................ 219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:ENABle..............................................219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PROTocol.......................................... 220
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PORT................................................ 220
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:WSIZe............................................... 221
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:ENABle................................................ 221
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
218
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PROTocol............................................ 221
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PORT.................................................. 222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:IPADdress............................................222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:WSIZe................................................. 222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PCONnection........................................223
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:BITRate............................................... 223
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPERf....................................................................................... 223
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPERf.......................................................................................... 223
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPERf.........................................................................................223
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe?............................................................................224
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe:ALL?..................................................................... 224
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?.......................................................................... 225
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?........................................................................... 225
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?............................................................................ 226
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?..............................................................................226
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:ALL?................................................................................ 226
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:TDURation <TestDuration>
Defines the time the test should last.
Parameters:
<TestDuration>
Example:
Range:
1 s to 1E+6 s
*RST:
1000 s
Default unit: s
See Performing an IPerf Measurement
Manual operation:
See "Test Duration" on page 92
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:PSIZe <PacketSize>
Defines the packet size for IPerf tests.
Parameters:
<PacketSize>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
1470 byte
Default unit: byte
Manual operation:
See "Packet Size" on page 92
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:ENABle <Enable>
Activates or deactivates an IPerf server instance.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
219
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Enable>
.
1..8
Selects the server instance
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
ON for instance 1, else OFF
Manual operation:
See "Server Settings" on page 93
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PROTocol <Protocol>
Selects the protocol type to be used for an IPerf server instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Protocol>
.
1..8
UDP | TCP
UDP: use the User Datagram Protocol for data transfer
TCP: use the Transport Control Protocol for data transfer
*RST:
Example:
TCP
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PORT <Port>
Defines the LAN DAU port number for an IPerf server instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Port>
Example:
.
1..8
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
5001 to 5008 for instance 1 to 8
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
220
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:WSIZe <WindowSize>
Specifies the size of the NACK window for an IPerf server instance. Only applicable for
protocol type TCP.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<WindowSize>
Example:
.
1..8
Range:
0 kByte to 10.24E+3 kByte
*RST:
0 kByte
Default unit: kByte
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:ENABle <Enable>
Activates or deactivates an IPerf client instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Enable>
.
1..8
Selects the client instance
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
ON for instance 1, else OFF
Manual operation:
See "Client Settings" on page 93
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PROTocol <Protocol>
Selects the protocol type to be used for an IPerf client instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Protocol>
.
1..8
UDP | TCP
UDP: use the User Datagram Protocol for data transfer
TCP: use the Transport Control Protocol for data transfer
*RST:
Example:
TCP
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
221
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PORT <Port>
Defines the LAN DAU port number for an IPerf client instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Port>
Example:
.
1..8
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
5001 to 5008 for instance 1 to 8
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:IPADdress <IPAddress>
Specifies the IP address of the mobile for an IPerf client instance.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
.
1..8
String containing the IP address
*RST:
Example:
'172.22.1.100'
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:WSIZe <WindowSize>
Specifies the size of the NACK window for an IPerf client instance. Only applicable for
protocol type TCP.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<WindowSize>
Example:
.
1..8
Range:
0 kByte to 10.24E+3 kByte
*RST:
0 kByte
Default unit: kByte
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
222
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PCONnection <ParConn>
Specifies the number of parallel connections for an IPerf client instance. Only applicable for protocol type TCP.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<ParConn>
Example:
.
1..8
Range:
*RST:
1 to 4
1
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:BITRate <BitRate>
Defines the maximum bit rate for an IPerf client instance. Only applicable for protocol
type UDP.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<BitRate>
.
1..8
Maximum bit rate to be transferred
Range:
0 bit/s to 1E+9 bit/s
*RST:
1 bit/s
Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPERf
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPERf

"RUN" state.
measurement.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
223
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe?
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe:ALL?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
224
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?
Queries the uplink throughput for all server instances.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<UpBandwidth>
Comma separated list of 8 results (server instance 1 to 8)

Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Results" on page 92
225
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?
Queries the downlink throughput for all client instances.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<DownBandwidth>
Comma separated list of 8 results (client instance 1 to 8)

Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:ALL?
Queries all client and server results of the IPerf measurement.
For each server/client instance five results are returned, from instance 1 to instance 8:
<Reliability>, {<ServerCounter>, <ClientCounter>, <UpBandwidth>, <PackErrRate>,
<DownBandwidth>}instance 1, {...}instance 2, ..., {...}instance 8
IPerf results are usually queried within a loop, in order to monitor the results over some
time. IPerf delivers new results once per second. If your loop is faster, several consecutive queries deliver the same results. Use the <ServerCounter> and <ClientCounter>
to identify redundant results and discard them.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<ServerResultCounter>
Counter for server results
The first result delivered by IPerf is labeled 0, the second result
1, and so on.
<ClientResultCounter>Counter for client results
The first result delivered by IPerf is labeled 0, the second result
1, and so on.
<UpBandwidth>
Uplink throughput, determined for active server instances

Default unit: bit/s
<PackErrRate>
Percentage of lost packets, determined for active server instances with protocol type UDP
Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<DownBandwidth>
Downlink throughput, determined for active client instances

Default unit: bit/s
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
226
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.4 Throughput Measurement

The commands in this section are related to the throughput measurement. They configure the measurement, control it and return the current measurement state and the
measurement results.
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:INTerval?............................................................... 227
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt............................................................227
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput..............................................................................228
STOP:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput................................................................................ 228
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput...............................................................................228
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe?..................................................................228
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe:ALL?........................................................... 229
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?......................... 230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?......................... 230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?...........................230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?...........................230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?..........................230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?..........................230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?........................... 230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?........................... 230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?......................................................231
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?.......................................................231
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?......................................................231
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?.......................................................231
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:INTerval?
Queries the time interval between two throughput measurement results.
Return values:
<Interval>
In the current software version, the value is fixed.

*RST:
1s
Default unit: s
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Settings" on page 95
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt <MaxCount>
Specifies the total number of throughput results to be measured.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
227
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<MaxCount>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
5 to 3600
5
See Performing a Throughput Measurement
V3.0.10: Range and *RST value changed
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
STOP:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput

"RUN" state.
measurement.

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
228
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
OFF
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe:ALL?
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
Query only
229
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?
Query the values of the overall throughput trace in uplink (ULINk) or downlink (DLINk)
direction.
The trace values are returned from left to right (first to last measurement), one result
per interval, see CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt on page 227.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Results>

Comma separated list of throughput values, one result per interval
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?
Query the values of the overall throughput trace in uplink (ULINk) or downlink (DLINk)
direction.
The trace values are returned from left to right (first to last measurement). There are
two values per interval:
<Reliability>, {<Counter>, <Result>}interval 1, {...}interval 2, ..., {...}interval n
The counter is useful if you want to perform repeated queries and combine the
returned result traces.
To configure the number of intervals, see CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:
THRoughput:MCOunt on page 227.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Counter>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14

Counter for identification of the result value
The counter starts with 1 and is incremented for each result as
long as the measurement is running.
230
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<Result>
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?
Query the statistical results of the throughput measurement in uplink direction.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<ThCurrUpLink>
Current throughput
Range:
<ThMinUpLink>
Minimum throughput
Range:
<ThMaxUpLink>
Maximum throughput
Range:
<ThAvgUpLink>
Average throughput
Range:
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?
Query the statistical results of the throughput measurement in downlink direction.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<ThCurrDLink>
Current throughput
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
<ThMinDLink>
Minimum throughput
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
<ThMaxDLink>
Maximum throughput
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
231
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<ThAvgDLink>
Average throughput
Range:
Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.5 DNS Requests Measurement

The commands in this section are related to the DNS requests measurement. They
control the measurement and return the current measurement state and the measurement results.
CONFigure:DATA:MEASurement<inst>:DNSRequests:MICount......................................... 232
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests........................................................................... 232
STOP:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests..............................................................................232
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests.............................................................................232
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe?................................................................233
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe:ALL?......................................................... 233
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:RCOunt?..............................................................234
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests?.......................................................................... 234
CONFigure:DATA:MEASurement<inst>:DNSRequests:MICount <MaxIndexCount>
Specifies the maximum length of the result list for "DNS Requests" measurements.
The result list is stored in a ring buffer. When it is full, the first result line is deleted
whenever a new result line is added to the end.
Parameters:
<MaxIndexCount>
Maximum number of DNS requests in the result list

Range:
*RST:
Example:
1 to 1000
1000
See Monitoring DNS Requests
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
STOP:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests

"RUN" state.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
232
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
measurement.

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe?
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

RUN: measurement running, synchronization pending or adjusted, resources active or queued
available
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe:ALL?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
233
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:RCOunt?
Queries the number of already monitored DNS requests.
Return values:
<ReqCount>
Number of requests
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests?
Queries information about the monitored DNS requests.
After the reliability indicator, four results are returned for each DNS request:
<Reliability>, {<ClientIP>, <URL>, <IP>, <Timestamp>}request 1, {...}request 2, ...
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
234
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
To query the number of monitored requests, see SENSe:DATA:MEAS:

DNSRequests:RCOunt?.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<ClientIP>
String indicating the IP address of the client (mobile) that has

sent the DNS request
<URL>
String indicating the domain or application to be resolved
<IP>
String indicating the IP address or domain returned as answer to

the DNS request
<Timestamp>
Timestamp as string in the format 'hh:mm:ss'
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.6 IP Logging
The commands in this section are related to the IP logging application. They configure
and control IP logging and return the current state of the application.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:TYPE...................................................................235
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FNAMe?.................................................................... 236
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FSIZe...................................................................236
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PCOunter............................................................. 236
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PSLength............................................................. 237
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging................................................................................. 237
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging....................................................................................237
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging...................................................................................237
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe?......................................................................238
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe:ALL?............................................................... 238
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:TYPE <LoggingType>
Selects the interface to be monitored.
Parameters:
<LoggingType>
UPIP | UPPP | LANDau | UPMulti

UPIP: IP unicast traffic from/to mobile
UPPP: PPP encapsulated IP traffic from/to mobile
LANDau: IP traffic at LAN DAU connector
UPMulti: IP multicast traffic to mobile
*RST:
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
UPIP
See Performing IP Logging
235
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
V3.2.40: added UPMulti
Options:
R&S CMW-KA150 for multicast traffic
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FNAMe?
Queries the current or next log file name.
If IP logging is on, the name of the currently used log file is returned.
If IP logging is off, the name of the file to be created in the next logging session is
returned.
Return values:
<FileName>
File name as string
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FSIZe <FileSize>
Configures the maximum log file size. When this file size is reached, logging stops.
The default value 0 byte means that no limit is defined.
Parameters:
<FileSize>
Example:
Range:
0 byte to 1E+9 byte
*RST:
0 byte
Default unit: byte
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PCOunter <PacketCounter>
Configures the maximum number of IP packets to be logged. When this number of
packets is reached, logging stops.
The default value 0 means that no limit is defined.
Parameters:
<PacketCounter>
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
Range:
*RST:
0 to 1E+6
0
236
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PSLength <PktSnapLength>
Configures the maximum number of bytes to be logged for each IP packet. If the
packet is longer, only the specified number of bytes is logged. The remaining bytes of
the packet are ignored.
The default value 0 means that no limit is defined.
Parameters:
<PktSnapLength>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
0 byte
Default unit: byte
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging

"RUN" state.
measurement.

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Logging Control" on page 100
237
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe?
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
OFF
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe:ALL?
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
238
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.7 IP Analysis
The commands in this section are related to the IP analysis application.
6.3.7.1
Application Control and States, Database Export................................................. 239

Enabling Results and Views..................................................................................241
TCP Analysis Settings and Results.......................................................................243
IP Connectivity Results......................................................................................... 247
Data Pie Charts Settings and Results...................................................................250
Flow Throughput and Trigger Results...................................................................253
Voice over IMS Results.........................................................................................255
Application Control and States, Database Export

The following commands control the IP analysis application and return the current
application state.
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis................................................................................ 239
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis...................................................................................239
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis................................................................................. 239
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe?.....................................................................240
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe:ALL?..............................................................240
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:EXPortdb............................................................ 241
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis

"RUN" state.
measurement.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
239
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference

released.

Control"
Example:
See Performing IP Analysis
Usage:
Event
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe?
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe:ALL?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
240
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:EXPortdb
Stores the IP analysis result database to a .csv file on the DAU hard disk.
Example:
Usage:
Event
6.3.7.2
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Export DB (hotkey)" on page 103
Enabling Results and Views

The following commands select the evaluated results and the displayed views.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
241
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult[:ALL]........................................................242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:TCPanalysis............................................. 242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:IPConnect................................................ 242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:DPCP...................................................... 242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:VOIMs..................................................... 243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:FTTRigger................................................243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult[:ALL] <TCPAnalysis>,
<IPConnect>, <DPCP>, <FTTRigger>, <VOIMs>
Enables or disables the display of the individual detailed views and the evaluation of
the related results. This command combines all other
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult... commands.
Parameters:
<TCPAnalysis>
OFF | ON
"TCP Analysis" view
OFF: Do not evaluate results, hide the view
ON: Evaluate results and show the view
*RST:
<IPConnect>
ON
OFF | ON
"IP Connectivity" view
*RST:
<DPCP>
ON
OFF | ON
"Data Pie Charts" view
*RST:
<FTTRigger>
ON
OFF | ON
"Flow Throughput and Event Trigger" view
*RST:
<VOIMs>
ON
OFF | ON
"Voice over IMS" view
*RST:
Example:
ON
V3.2.40: added <VOIMs>
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Disabling views / Assign View hotkey" on page 102
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:TCPanalysis <Enable>
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:IPConnect <Enable>
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:DPCP <Enable>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
242
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:VOIMs <Enable>
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:FTTRigger <Enable>
Enables or disables the display of the individual detailed views and the evaluation of
the related results.
The mnemonic after "RESult" denotes the view: "TCP Analysis", "IP Connectivity",
"Data Pie Charts", "Voice over IMS" and "Flow Throughput and Event Trigger".
Parameters:
<Enable>
OFF | ON
OFF: Do not evaluate results, hide the view
ON: Evaluate results and show the view
*RST:
ON
V3.2.40: added
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:VOIMs
6.3.7.3
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Disabling views / Assign View hotkey" on page 102
TCP Analysis Settings and Results

The following commands configure the "TCP Analysis" view and return the related
results.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TWSThreshold..................................243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TRTHreshold.................................... 244
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TOTHreshold....................................244
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:FLOWid?............................................... 244
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:ALL?......................................................245
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:DETails?................................................246
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TWSThreshold <Threshold>
Defines a threshold (upper limit) for the current TCP window size as percentage of the
negotiated maximum window size.
Parameters:
<Threshold>
Example:
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
90 %
Default unit: %
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Threshold Configuration" on page 105
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
243
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TRTHreshold <Threshold>
Defines a threshold (upper limit) for TCP retransmissions as percentage of all transmissions.
Parameters:
<Threshold>
Example:
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
10 %
Default unit: %
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TOTHreshold <Threshold>
Defines a threshold (upper limit) for the TCP overhead as percentage of the packet
consumed by headers.
Parameters:
<Threshold>
Example:
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
50 %
Default unit: %
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:FLOWid? <FlowID>
Queries the threshold check and throughput results for a specific connection, selected
via its flow ID.
Query parameters:
<FlowID>
Selects the connection for which information shall be queried
Return values:
<ThDown>
Throughput in downlink direction

Default unit: bit/s
<TCPWSDown>
OK | FULL
Threshold check result for downlink TCP window size
<RetrDown>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for downlink retransmissions
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
244
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<OverhDown>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for downlink overhead
<ThUp>
Throughput in uplink direction

Default unit: bit/s
<TCPWSUp>
OK | FULL
Threshold check result for uplink TCP window size
<RetrUp>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for uplink retransmissions
<OverhUp>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for uplink overhead
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:ALL?
Queries the threshold check and throughput results for all connections.
After the reliability indicator, nine results are returned for each connection (flow):
<Reliability>, {<FlowID>, <ThDown>, <TCPWSDown>, <RetrDown>, <OverhDown>,
<ThUp>, <TCPWSUp>, <RetrUp>, <OverhUp>}connection 1, {...}connection 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
<FlowID>
Flow ID of the connection
<ThDown>
Throughput in downlink direction

Default unit: bit/s
<TCPWSDown>
OK | FULL
Threshold check result for downlink TCP window size
<RetrDown>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for downlink retransmissions
<OverhDown>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for downlink overhead
<ThUp>
Throughput in uplink direction

Default unit: bit/s
<TCPWSUp>
OK | FULL
Threshold check result for uplink TCP window size
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
245
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<RetrUp>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for uplink retransmissions
<OverhUp>
OK | NOK
Threshold check result for uplink overhead
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:DETails? <FlowID>
Queries the "TCP Analysis" details for a specific connection, selected via its flow ID.
Query parameters:
<FlowID>
Return values:
<IPAddrSource>
IP address of the connection source as string
<IPPortSource>
Port number of the connection source

Range:
0 to 65654
<IPAddrDest>
IP address of the connection destination as string
<IPPortDest>
Port number of the connection destination

Range:
0 to 65654
<CurrTCPWSDown> Negotiated maximum downlink TCP window size

Default unit: byte
<MaxTCPWSDown> Downlink overhead as percentage of the packet
Range:
<RetrDown>
0 % to 100 %
Measured uplink TCP window size

Default unit: byte
<OverhDown>
Negotiated maximum uplink TCP window size

Default unit: byte
<CurrTCPWSUp>
Uplink retransmission rate

Range:
0 % to 100 %
<MaxTCPWSUp>
Range:
not used to not used
<RetrUp>
Range:
not used to not used
Default unit: %
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
246
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<OverhUp>
Uplink overhead as percentage of the packet

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
6.3.7.4
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
IP Connectivity Results
The following commands return the results of the "IP Connectivity" view.
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:STATistics?...............................................247
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:FLOWid?.................................................. 247
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:ALL?.........................................................248
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:STATistics?
Queries the statistical information provided by the "IP Connectivity" view.
Return values:
<NoOfConn>
Total number of connections
<NoOfOpenC>
Number of closed connections
<NoOfClosedC>
Number of closed TCP connections
<OpenTCPC>
Number of closed UDP connections
<ClosedTCPC>
Range:
0 to not used
<OpenUDPC>
Range:
0 to not used
<ClosedUDPC>
Range:
0 to not used
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:FLOWid? <FlowID>
Queries the "IP Connectivity" results for a specific connection, selected via its flow ID.
Query parameters:
<FlowID>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
247
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<ConnStatus>
OPEN | CLOSed
Connection status
<Protocol>
Layer 4 protocol as string ("TCP", "UDP", ...)
<DPIProtocol>
Layer 7 protocol as string ("HTTP", "FTP", ...)
<IPAddrSource>
<IPPortSource>

Range:
0 to 65654
<IPAddrDest>
<IPPortDest>

Range:
<OverhDown>
0 to 65654
Downlink overhead as percentage of the packet

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<OverhUp>

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<AvgPSDown>
Average downlink packet size

Range:
Default unit: byte
<AvgPSUp>
Average uplink packet size

Range:
Default unit: byte
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:ALL?
Queries the "IP Connectivity" results for all connections.
After the reliability indicator, results are returned per connection (flow):
<Reliability>, {<FlowID>, <ConnStatus>, <LST>, <SysClock>, <Protocol>, <DPIProtocol>, <IPAddrSource>, <IPPortSource>, <IPAddrDest>, <IPPortDest>, <OverhDown>,
<OverhUp>, <AvgPSDown>, <AvgPSUp>}connection 1, {...}connection 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
248
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<FlowID>
Flow ID of the connection
<ConnStatus>
OPEN | CLOSed
Connection status
<LST>
Local system time, incremented every ms

The clock starts when the instrument is switched on.
<SysClock>
System clock in units of 10 ns

When 1 ms is reached (100*10 ns), the clock is reset to 0 and
the local system time is incremented.
Range:
0 to 99
<Protocol>
<DPIProtocol>
Layer 7 protocol as string ("HTTP", "FTP", ...)
<IPAddrSource>
<IPPortSource>

Range:
0 to 65654
<IPAddrDest>
<IPPortDest>

Range:
<OverhDown>
0 to 65654
Downlink overhead as percentage of the packet

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<OverhUp>

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<AvgPSDown>
Average downlink packet size

Range:
Default unit: byte
<AvgPSUp>
Average uplink packet size

Range:
Default unit: byte
Example:
Usage:
Query only
V3.2.40: added <LST> and <SysClock>
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
249
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
6.3.7.5
Data Pie Charts Settings and Results

The following commands configure the "Data Pie Charts" view and return the related
results.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP........................................... 250
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer:LAYer..........................................250
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPConnection?................................................250
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPPRotocol?................................................... 251
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer?........................................................ 252
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?....................................................... 252
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP <AppSelected>
Selects a layer of the "Data per Application" pie chart view.
You can navigate from the current layer to the next lower or higher layer. The initial
current layer is the application layer. The lower layers are layer 7, layer 4 and layer 3.
To query the entries (strings) of the current layer, see FETCh:DATA:MEAS:
IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic? on page 252.
Parameters:
<AppSelected>
Example:
String with an entry of the current layer: Navigates to the next

lower layer for this entry
"Back" or string unknown at the current layer: Navigates back to
the next higher layer
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Application" on page 109
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer:LAYer <Layer>
Selects an analysis layer for the "Data per Layer" pie chart view.
Parameters:
<Layer>
FEATure | APP | L7 | L4 | L3
*RST:
APP
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Layer" on page 108
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPConnection?
Queries the "Data per Connection" results.
After the reliability indicator, three results are returned for each connection:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
250
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<Reliability>, {<RemDestination>, <ConnData>, <ConnPercent>}conn 1, {...}conn 2, ...

Return values:
<Reliability>
<RemDestination>
IP address of the remote destination as string
<ConnData>
Data transported via the connection, as absolute number

Default unit: byte
<ConnPercent>
Data transported via the connection, as percentage of total

transported data
Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Connection" on page 107
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPPRotocol?
Queries the "Data per Protocol" results.
After the reliability indicator, three results are returned for each protocol:
<Reliability>, {<Protocol>, <ProtData>, <ProtPercent>}protocol 1, {...}protocol 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Protocol>
Used protocol as string
<ProtData>
Data transported via the protocol, as absolute number

Default unit: byte
<ProtPercent>
Data transported via the protocol, as percentage of total transported data

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Protocol" on page 108
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
251
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer? <LayerDepth>
Queries the "Data per Layer" results.
After the reliability indicator, three values are returned for each result table row:
<Reliability>, {<Layer>, <LayerData>, <LayerPercent>}row 1, {...}row 2, ...
Query parameters:
<LayerDepth>
FEATure | APP | L7 | L4 | L3
Selects the highest layer at which the packets are analyzed
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Layer>
String with the contents of column "Layer" (feature, application

or protocol)
<LayerData>
Amount of transported data, as absolute value

Default unit: byte
<LayerPercent>
Amount of transported data, as percentage of total transported

data
Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Layer" on page 108
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?
Queries the "Data per Application" results of the current layer. To navigate between the
layers, see CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP
on page 250.
After the reliability indicator, three values are returned for each result table row:
<Reliability>, {<App>, <AppData>, <AppPercent>}row 1, {...}row 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
<App>
String with the contents of column "Application" (application or

protocol)
<AppData>
Amount of transported data, as absolute value

Default unit: byte
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
252
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<AppPercent>
Amount of transported data, as percentage of total transported

data
Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
6.3.7.6
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Data Per Application" on page 109
Flow Throughput and Trigger Results

The following commands configure the "Flow Throughput and Event Trigger" view and
return the related results.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACe<TraceIndex>:TFLowid.............. 253
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACes<TraceIndex>:FTHRoughput?.........253
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:STARt?....................................... 254
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:END?.......................................... 254
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACe<TraceIndex>:TFLowid
<FlowID>
Assigns a connection (flow ID) to a trace index.
Suffix:
<TraceIndex>
Parameters:
<FlowID>
.
1..10
Selects the trace to which the connection (flow ID) shall be
assigned
Flow ID of the connection to be assigned to the trace index
*RST:
Example:
<FlowID> = <TraceIndex>
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACes<TraceIndex>:
FTHRoughput?
Queries a selected throughput trace.
The trace is selected via its trace index. To assign a specific connection to a trace
index, see CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:
TRACe<TraceIndex>:TFLowid.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
253
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<TraceIndex>
.
1..10
Selects the trace that shall be returned.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<FlowID>
Flow ID of the connection assigned to the selected trace index
<Throughput>
Comma separated list of throughput values

Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:STARt?
Queries the event trigger trace for "open" events.
After the reliability indicator, two values are returned per "open" event:
<Reliability>, {<FlowID>, <TimeElapsed>}event 1, {<FlowID>, <TimeElapsed>}event 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
<FlowID>
Flow ID of the opened connection as string
<TimeElapsed>
X-axis value of the "open" event
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:END?
Queries the event trigger trace for "close" events.
After the reliability indicator, two values are returned per "close" event:
<Reliability>, {<FlowID>, <TimeElapsed>}event 1, {<FlowID>, <TimeElapsed>}event 2, ...
Return values:
<Reliability>
<FlowID>
Flow ID of the closed connection as string
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
254
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<TimeElapsed>
X-axis value of the "close" event
Example:
Usage:
Query only
6.3.7.7
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
Voice over IMS Results

The following commands return the results of the "Voice over IMS" view.
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:ALL?.............................................................. 255
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:FLOWs?........................................................ 256
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:PERDtx?........................................................ 257
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:JITTer?.......................................................... 257
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:ALL?
Queries the call table in the upper part of the "Voice Over IMS" view.
The results are returned row by row (call by call):
<Reliability>, {<ConID>, ..., <UserTo>}call 1, {...}call 2, ..., {...}call n
Return values:
<Reliability>
<ConID>
Call ID
<FlowsIDs>
String containing a comma-separated list of the flow IDs related

to the call (example "1,2" or "128")
<Type>
AUDio | VIDeo | EMER | UNK

Call type audio, video, emergency or unknown
<Origin>
MT | MO | UNK
MT: mobile-terminating call
MO: mobile-originating call
UNK: unknown
<State>
RING | EST | REL | HOLD | UNK

RING: mobile ringing
EST: call established
REL: call released
HOLD: call on hold
UNK: unknown
<StartTime>
String indicating the time when the call setup was initiated
<SetupTime>
Duration of the call setup procedure

Default unit: s
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
255
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<Duration>
Duration of the call

Default unit: s
<UserFrom>
String with the user ID or phone number of the calling party
<UserTo>
String with the user ID or phone number of the called party
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Table (upper part)" on page 112
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:FLOWs? <SessionID>, <FlowID>,

<Direction>, <Type>
Queries flow information related to a voice over IMS call.
To select the desired information, specify <ConID>, <FlowID>, <Direction> and
<Type>.
A query returns the values: <FlowID>, <Direction>, <Type>, <Codec>, <SeqNumber>,
<NumPack>, <Throughput>.
Parameters:
<FlowID>
<Direction>
Flow ID, as returned by FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:

VOIMs:ALL?
UL | DL | UNK
Flow direction uplink, downlink or unknown
<Type>
AUDio | VIDeo | UNKNow

Flow type audio, video or unknown
Query parameters:
<SessionID>
Call ID, as returned by FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:

VOIMs:ALL?
Return values:
<Codec>
String indicating the used codec
<SeqNumber>
Sequence number of the currently processed packet
<NumPack>
Number of already processed packets
<Throughput>
Current audio or video data throughput at the RTP level

Default unit: bit/s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
R&S CMW-KM051
256
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Flows Info subtab (lower part)" on page 113
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:PERDtx? <ConID>
Queries the packets measurement results for a selected voice over IMS call.
To get a list of all calls and their IDs, use FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:
VOIMs:ALL? on page 255.
Query parameters:
<ConID>
Selects the call for which the results are queried
Return values:
<PERUp>
Packet error rate in the uplink

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<PERDown>
Packet error rate in the downlink

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<DTXUp>
Discontinuous transmission rate in the uplink

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
<DTXDown>
Discontinuous transmission rate in the downlink

Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Packets Meas subtab (lower part)" on page 114
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:JITTer? <ConID>
Queries the jitter results for a selected voice over IMS call.
To get a list of all calls and their IDs, use FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:
VOIMs:ALL? on page 255.
Query parameters:
<ConID>
Selects the call for which the results are queried
Return values:
<JitterMaxUp>
Maximum jitter in the uplink

Default unit: s
<JitterAvgUp>
Average jitter in the uplink

Default unit: s
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
257
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<JitterMinUp>
Minimum jitter in the uplink

Default unit: s
<JitterMaxDown>
Maximum jitter in the downlink

Default unit: s
<JitterAvgDown>
Average jitter in the downlink

Default unit: s
<JitterMinDown>
Minimum jitter in the downlink

Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Options:
R&S CMW-KM051
Manual operation:
See "Jitter subtab (lower part)" on page 114
6.3.8 IP Replay
The commands in this section are related to the IP replay application.
6.3.8.1
Playlist Configuration and Control.........................................................................258

Application Control and States..............................................................................261
File Information..................................................................................................... 263
Playlist Configuration and Control

The following commands configure the playlist, start/stop replaying the list and return
progress information.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist..............................................................258
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:REMovelist............................................................ 259
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:ITERation.............................................................. 259
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INTerface...............................................................260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall................................................................. 260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STOPall.................................................................260
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PROGress?................................................................. 260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist <FileName>[, <Iteration>,

<NetworkInterface>]
Adds a single file to the playlist. This is only possible in the measurement state OFF.
A query returns all files in the playlist as follows:
{<FileName>, <Iteration>, <NetworkInterface>}file 1, {...}file 2, ..., {...}file n
To query a list of all files in the ip_replay directory, see FETCh:DATA:MEAS:
IPReplay:FILelist? on page 263.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
258
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Parameters:
<FileName>
<Iteration>
File name as a string. Specify the file name with extension but
without path, for example "myfile.pcap".
Specifies how often the file is replayed
Range:
*RST:
<NetworkInterface>
0 to 10E+3
1
LANDau | IP | MULTicast
LANDau: IP traffic to the LAN DAU connector
IP: IP unicast traffic to the mobile
MULTicast: IP multicast traffic to the mobile
*RST:
Example:
MULT
See Performing IP Replay
Manual operation:
See "Edit Playlist (hotkey)" on page 117
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:REMovelist
Removes all files from the playlist. This is only possible in the measurement state OFF.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Clear Playlist (hotkey)" on page 117
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:ITERation <FileName>, <Iteration>

Specifies how often a selected file in the playlist is replayed. This is possible if the playlist is currently not played, even in measurement state RUN.
{<FileName>, <Iteration>}file 1, {...}file 2, ..., {...}file n
Parameters:
<FileName>
<Iteration>
Specifies how often the file is replayed
Range:
*RST:
Example:
0 to 10E+3
1
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
259
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INTerface <FileName>, <NetworkInterface>

Specifies the network interface for a selected file in the playlist. This is possible if the
playlist is currently not played, even in measurement state RUN.
{<FileName>, <NetworkInterface>}file 1, {...}file 2, ..., {...}file n
Setting parameters:
<FileName>
<NetworkInterface>
LANDau | IP | MULTicast
LANDau: IP traffic to the LAN DAU connector
IP: IP unicast traffic to the mobile
MULTicast: IP multicast traffic to the mobile
*RST:
Example:
MULT
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall
Starts replaying the playlist.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Play/Stop (hotkeys)" on page 117
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STOPall
Stops replaying the playlist.
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
See "Play/Stop (hotkeys)" on page 117
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PROGress?
Queries the replay progress for all files in the playlist. This is only possible while the
playlist is replayed.
The results are returned as follows:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
260
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
{<FileName>, <Progress>}file 1, {...}file 2, ..., {...}file n

Return values:
<FileName>
File name as a string
<Progress>
Range:
0 % to 100 %
Default unit: %
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.8.2
See "Playlist (upper part of tab)" on page 116
Application Control and States

The following commands control the IP replay application and return the current application state.
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay...................................................................................261
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay..................................................................................... 261
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay.................................................................................... 261
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe?....................................................................... 262
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe:ALL?................................................................ 262
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay

"RUN" state.
measurement.

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Application Control" on page 118
261
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe?
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
OFF
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe:ALL?
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
262
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
6.3.8.3
File Information
The following commands query information about the files in the ip_replay directory
and in the playlist.
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:FILelist?.......................................................................263
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile?......................................................................263
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile?................................................................. 264
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:FILelist?
Queries a list of all files in the directory ip_replay of the samba share.
Return values:
<Files>
Comma-separated list of strings, one string per filename
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile? <FileName>
Queries information about a selected file in the playlist.
If the file has not yet been analyzed and the measurement state is RUN, the command
triggers file analysis. The analysis takes some time. Repeat the command until the
analysis results are available.
Query parameters:
<FileName>
Return values:
<NumberOfPackets> Number of IP packets in the file
<FileSize>
Default unit: byte
<Bitrate>
Default unit: bit/s
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
263
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
<Duration>
Default unit: s
<Type>
String indicating the file type and information about the capturing
application
<Encapsulation>
"Raw IP": file contains raw IP traffic

"Ethernet": file contains IP traffic plus ethernet headers
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Playlist (upper part of tab)" on page 116
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile? <FileName>
Queries information about all IP connections contained in a selected file of the playlist.
If the file has not yet been analyzed and the measurement state is RUN, the command
triggers file analysis. The analysis takes some time. Repeat the command until the
analysis results are available.
The results are returned as follows:
{<L4Protocol>, <NoOfPackets>, ..., <IPDstPort>}conn 1, {...}conn 2, ...
Query parameters:
<FileName>
Return values:
<L4Protocol>
<NoOfPackets>
Number of IP packets for the connection
<IPSrcAddress>
<IPSrcPort>
<IPDstAddress>
<IPDstPort>
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Connection Information (lower part of tab)" on page 117
6.3.9 Audio Delay Measurement

The commands in this section are related to the audio delay measurement. They configure the measurement, control it and return the current measurement state and the
measurement results.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
264
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SAMPles?............................................................... 265
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SPINterval?.............................................................265
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples.............................................................. 266
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:ADELay.................................................................................... 266
STOP:DATA:MEAS:ADELay.......................................................................................266
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:ADELay..................................................................................... 266
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe?........................................................................ 266
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe:ALL?..................................................................267
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?............................................. 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?............................................. 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?...................................... 268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?...............................................268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?...............................................268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?........................................268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?..........................................268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?.................................... 268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?........................................... 268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?..................................... 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?......................................................................... 269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?......................................................................... 269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?...................................................................269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?...........................................................................269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?...........................................................................269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?....................................................................269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?...................................................................... 269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?................................................................ 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?....................................................................... 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?................................................................. 269
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SAMPles?
Queries the fixed duration of a measurement interval.
Return values:
<Interval>
Range:
1s
Default unit: s
Example:
See Performing an Audio Delay Measurement
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SPINterval?
Queries the fixed number of measurement samples per interval.
Return values:
<SmplPerInterval>
Range:
Example:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
50
265
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples <MaxSamples>
Configures the maximum number of samples that can be displayed in the result diagrams. The traces cover the sample range -<MaxSamples> + 1 to 0.
Parameters:
<MaxSamples>
Example:
Range:
*RST:
1500 to 6000
3000
Manual operation:
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
STOP:DATA:MEAS:ADELay
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:ADELay

"RUN" state.
measurement.

released.

Control"
Example:
Usage:
Event
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe?
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
266
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<MeasState>
OFF | RUN | RDY

available
*RST:
Usage:
OFF
Query only
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe:ALL?
Return values:
<MainState>
OFF | RDY | RUN

available
*RST:
<SyncState>
OFF
PEND | ADJ | INV

("adjusted")
<ResourceState>
QUE | ACT | INV

("queued")
Usage:
Query only
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
267
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?
Query the values of the audio delay traces "Uplink", "Downlink" and "Loopback".
The trace values are returned from left to right, from sample number -n to sample number 0. n equals the configured maximum number of samples minus one, see
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples on page 266.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Results>
Comma-separated list of delay values, one result per sample

Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Delay Result Diagram" on page 120
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?
Query the values of the time of arrival traces "Uplink" and "Loopback".
The trace values are returned from left to right, from sample number -n to sample number 0. n equals the configured maximum number of samples minus one, see
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples on page 266.
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Results>

Comma-separated list of time error values, one result per sample
Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Time of Arrival Result Diagram" on page 121
268
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?
Query the statistical audio delay results for "Uplink", "Downlink" and "Loopback".
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Results>

Comma-separated list of four results: <Current>, <Average>,
<Minimum>, <Maximum> value
Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Result Table" on page 121
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?
Query the statistical time of arrival results for "Uplink" and "Loopback".
Return values:
<Reliability>
<Results>

Comma-separated list of four results: <Current>, <Average>,
<Minimum>, <Maximum> value
Default unit: s
Example:
Usage:
Query only
Manual operation:
See "Result Table" on page 121
6.3.10 Network Impairments

The commands in this section configure and control network impairments for the IP
traffic in the downlink.
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:ENABle.............................................. 270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:IPADdress.......................................... 270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PRANge............................................. 270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PLRate............................................... 271
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
269
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DELay................................................ 271
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JITTer................................................ 272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JDIStribut........................................... 272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:RRATe............................................... 272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DRATe............................................... 273
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:CRATe............................................... 273
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe.................................................................273
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:ENABle <Enable>
Enables or disables a set of network impairments.
To apply network impairments, this feature must also be enabled globally, see
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe on page 273.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Enable>
.
1..7
Selects the set of network impairments
OFF | ON
*RST:
Example:
OFF
See Configuring Network Impairments
Manual operation:
See "Used" on page 123
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:IPADdress <IPAddress>
Specifies the destination address of the bearer to be impaired.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<IPAddress>
.
1..7
String indicating a full IPv4 address or a full IPv6 address or an
IPv6 prefix
*RST:
Example:
'172.22.1.100'
Manual operation:
See "IP Address, Port Range Start/End" on page 123
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PRANge <StartPort>,
<EndPort>
Specifies the port range used by the dedicated bearer to be impaired. If you want to
impair a default bearer, enter 0 for both parameters.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
270
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<StartPort>
.
1..7
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
0
<EndPort>
Range:
*RST:
0 to 65535
0
Example:
Manual operation:
See "IP Address, Port Range Start/End" on page 123
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PLRate <PacketLossRate>
Specifies the packet loss rate for a set of network impairments.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<PacketLossRate>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
0%
Default unit: %
Manual operation:
See "Packetloss Rate" on page 123
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DELay <Delay>
Specifies the delay for a set of network impairments.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Delay>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 s to 10 s
*RST:
0s
Default unit: s
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Delay" on page 123
271
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JITTer <Jitter>
Specifies the jitter for a set of network impairments. The jitter must be smaller than or
equal to the configured delay.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<Jitter>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 s to 10 s
*RST:
0s
Default unit: s
Manual operation:
See "Jitter, Jitter Distribution" on page 124
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JDIStribut <JitterDistr>
Specifies the jitter distribution for a set of network impairments.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<JitterDistr>
.
1..7
UNIForm | NORMal | PAReto | PNORmal
Uniform, normal, pareto and pareto normal distribution
*RST:
Example:
NORM
Manual operation:
See "Jitter, Jitter Distribution" on page 124
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:RRATe <ReorderRate>
Specifies the reordering rate for a set of network impairments.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<ReorderRate>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
0%
Default unit: %
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
272
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Manual operation:
See "Reordering Rate" on page 124
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DRATe <DuplicateRate>
Specifies the percentage of packets to be duplicated.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<DuplicateRate>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
0%
Default unit: %
Manual operation:
See "Duplicates Rate" on page 124
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:CRATe <CorruptRate>
Specifies the percentage of packets that shall be corrupted.
Suffix:
<Index>
Parameters:
<CorruptRate>
Example:
.
1..7
Range:
0 % to 100 %
*RST:
0%
Default unit: %
Manual operation:
See "Corruption Rate" on page 124
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe <Control>
Switches network impairments globally on or off. When on, the enabled sets of network
impairments are applied to the bearers defined in these sets.
To enable a set of impairments, see CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:
NIMPairments<Index>:ENABle on page 270.
Setting parameters:
<Control>
ON | OFF
Switch network impairments ON or OFF
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
273
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Command Reference
Return values:
<NIState>
OFF | PENDing | ON
OFF: impairments switched off
PEND: switching on/off the impairments is ongoing
ON: impairments switched on
*RST:
Example:
OFF
Manual operation:
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
See "Network Impairment Activation" on page 124
274
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Annex: Network Impairments

Delay and Jitter
7 Annex: Network Impairments

The DAU allows to simulate network impairments for any outgoing IP traffic, for example traffic from the DAU to a mobile or traffic from the DAU to a host reachable via the
LAN DAU connector.
The DAU applications "IP Analysis" and "IP Logging" monitor the outgoing traffic after
the network impairments have been applied. They have no information about the unimpaired traffic.
Analysis of packet retransmission with network impairments
In order to recognize a retransmitted packet, the "IP Analysis" application must receive
both the initially transmitted packet and the retransmitted packet.
If the initially transmitted packet gets lost after passing the application, the retransmitted packet is counted correctly by the "IP Analysis" application (for example packet
loss on the RF connection to a mobile).
If the initially transmitted packet gets lost before passing the application, the retransmitted packet is counted as initial transmission, not as retransmission (for example
packet loss rate configured as network impairment).
In the latter case you may want to use the "IP Logging" application to analyze the
retransmissions, for example by checking for retransmission requests.
The network impairments functionality of the DAU is based on the netem Linux kernel
module (see http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgroups/networking/
netem).
For configuration and control of network impairments, see Chapter 4.2.11, "Network
Impairments", on page 122.
The following sections illustrate the effect of the individual network impairment settings.
7.1 Delay and Jitter

To show the effect of configured delays and jitter distribution types, the Round Trip
Time (RTT) resulting from the settings has been analyzed with the ping application of
the DAU.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
275
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Delay and Jitter
The results are shown in the following sections. Dashed gray lines in the figures indicate the configured delay value the configured jitter value.
7.1.1 RTT Without Impairments

Without any configured delay or jitter, the following RTT have been measured by sending 300 ping requests. For the used setup, the RTT is less than 1 ms and fairly constant.
Figure 7-1: RTT vs. ping request, no impairments
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
0.16 ms
0.55 ms
0.31 ms
7.1.2 RTT With Delay (No Jitter)

With a configured delay of 70 ms, but without jitter, the measured RTT is increased by
70 ms.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
276
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Delay and Jitter
Figure 7-2: RTT vs. ping request, delay without jitter
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
70.19 ms
70.80 ms
70.38 ms
7.1.3 RTT With Uniform Jitter Distribution

A delay of 70 ms is configured and additionally a jitter of 10 ms with a uniform distribution.
In comparison to the previous setup (delay without jitter), the maximum RTT is
increased by the jitter value and the minimum RTT is decreased by the jitter value.
Figure 7-3: RTT vs. ping request, uniform jitter distribution
Within the interval [delay - jitter, delay + jitter], the measured RTT values are distributed uniformly. The following figure shows the distribution of 1000 measured RTT values (previous figure shows the first 300 of these 1000 values).
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
277
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Delay and Jitter
Figure 7-4: Histogram of uniform jitter distribution
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
60.32 ms
80.38 ms
70.39 ms
7.1.4 RTT With Normal Jitter Distribution

A delay of 70 ms is configured and additionally a jitter of 10 ms with a normal (Gaussian) distribution.
With this configuration, the following RTT values have been measured.
Figure 7-5: RTT vs. ping request, normal jitter distribution
For an ideal Gaussian distribution of the RTT values, the mean value of the distribution equals the delay and the standard deviation of the distribution equals the jitter.
The interval [ - , + ] contains 68.27 % of all RTT values. The interval [ - 2, +
2] contains 95.45 %.
The following figure shows the distribution of 1000 measured RTT values (previous figure shows the first 300 of these 1000 values).
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
278
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Delay and Jitter
Figure 7-6: Histogram of normal jitter distribution
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
39.45 ms
100.79 ms
70.51 ms
7.1.5 RTT With Pareto Jitter Distribution

Modeling of the delay jitter in a real network is still a matter of research. However,
some papers claim that the pareto distribution is suitable to model the delay jitter in the
Internet.
A delay of 70 ms is configured and additionally a jitter of 10 ms with a pareto distribution.
Figure 7-7: RTT vs. ping request, pareto jitter distribution
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
279
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Delay and Jitter
Figure 7-8: Histogram of pareto jitter distribution
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
63.67 ms
110.50 ms
69.81 ms
7.1.6 RTT With Pareto Normal Jitter Distribution

A delay of 70 ms is configured and additionally a jitter of 10 ms with a pareto normal
distribution (a combination of a normal distribution and a pareto distribution).
Figure 7-9: RTT vs. ping request, pareto normal jitter distribution
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
280
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Reordering Rate
Figure 7-10: Histogram of pareto normal jitter distribution
Minimum RTT
Maximum RTT
Average RTT
55.30 ms
109.19 ms
70.41 ms
7.2 Reordering Rate

Reordering of packets requires buffering of packets. So a configured delay is a prerequisite for packet reordering. For the examples in this section, a delay of 50 ms without
jitter is configured. UDP is used with an average packet rate of one packet per ms.
Each reordering rate result value is derived from a measurement interval of 100 packets. The following figures show the measured reordering rates for the first 300 measurement intervals (30000 packets). The configured reordering rates are 10 % and 25
%, as indicated by the gray dashed lines.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
281
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Reordering Rate
Figure 7-11: Reordering rate vs. measurement interval (10 % reordering configured)
Figure 7-12: Reordering rate vs. measurement interval (25 % reordering configured)
The following figures show the distribution of the reordering rates over all measured
intervals.
Figure 7-13: Reordering rate distribution (10 % reordering configured)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
282
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Duplicates Rate
Figure 7-14: Reordering rate distribution (25 % reordering configured)
7.3 Duplicates Rate

The effect of configured packet duplication rates is tested without configured delay,
with UDP and with an average packet rate of one packet per ms.
Each duplicates rate result value is derived from a measurement interval of 100 packets. The following figures show the measured duplicates rates for the first 300 measurement intervals (30000 packets). The configured duplicates rates are 10 % and 25
Figure 7-15: Duplicates rate vs. measurement interval (10 % duplicates configured)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
283
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Duplicates Rate
Figure 7-16: Duplicates rate vs. measurement interval (25 % duplicates configured)
The following figures show the distribution of the duplicates rates over all measured
intervals.
Figure 7-17: Duplicates rate distribution (10 % duplicates configured)
Figure 7-18: Duplicates rate distribution (25 % duplicates configured)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
284
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Packet Loss Rate
7.4 Packet Loss Rate

The effect of configured packet loss rates is tested without configured delay, with UDP
and with an average packet rate of one packet per ms.
Each packet loss rate result value is derived from a measurement interval of 100 packets. The following figures show the measured packet loss rates for the first 300 measurement intervals (30000 packets). The configured packet loss rates are 10 % and 25
Figure 7-19: Packet loss rate vs. measurement interval (10 % loss configured)
Figure 7-20: Packet loss rate vs. measurement interval (25 % loss configured)
The following figures show the distribution of the packet loss rates over all measured
intervals.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
285
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Corruption Rate
Figure 7-21: Packet loss rate distribution (10 % packet loss configured)
Figure 7-22: Packet loss rate distribution (25 % packet loss configured)
7.5 Corruption Rate

The effect of configured corruption rates is tested without configured delay, with UDP
and with an average packet rate of one packet per ms.
Each corruption rate result value is derived from a measurement interval of 100 packets. The value indicates the percentage of packets having a bit error.
The following figures show the measured corruption rates for the first 300 measurement intervals (30000 packets). The configured corruption rates are 10 % and 25 %, as
indicated by the gray dashed lines.
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
286
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Corruption Rate
Figure 7-23: Corruption rate vs. measurement interval (10 % corruption configured)
Figure 7-24: Corruption rate vs. measurement interval (25 % corruption configured)
The following figures show the distribution of the corruption rates over all measured
intervals.
Figure 7-25: Corruption rate distribution (10 % corruption configured)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
287
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Corruption Rate
Figure 7-26: Corruption rate distribution (25 % corruption configured)
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
288
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
List of Commands
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:ADELay...................................................................................................................266
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests......................................................................................................... 232
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis...............................................................................................................239
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPERf.......................................................................................................................223
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging................................................................................................................237
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay................................................................................................................. 261
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:PING....................................................................................................................... 215
ABORt:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput............................................................................................................228
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:ADD.......................................................................................164
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:DELete.................................................................................. 164
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess..................................................... 161
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess.................................................161
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess....................................................... 162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess................................................... 162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:FOReign:UDHCp......................................................................................162
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:ADD...............................................................................................163
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:DELete.......................................................................................... 163
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:PRIMary:STYPe....................................................................................... 159
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:SECondary:STYPe...................................................................................159
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:DOMain.......................................................................................... 165
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:STARt.............................................................................................165
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVFour.................................................................................203
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ADDRess:IPVSix................................................................................... 203
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:ALGorithm........................................................................... 209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:AMF.....................................................................................209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:IMSI..................................................................................... 208
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY..................................................................................... 209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:KEY:TYPE...........................................................................210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:OPC.....................................................................................210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:AUTHentic:RAND.................................................................................. 209
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:CERTificate....................................................................... 212
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:ENABle.............................................................................. 212
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CERTificate:KEY................................................................................... 212
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:ENABle..........................................................................................210
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:INTerval.........................................................................................211
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:DPD:TIMeout......................................................................................... 211
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:ENCRyption...................................................................................206
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ESP:INTegrity........................................................................................ 207
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:TYPE.................................................................................................204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:ID:VALue............................................................................................... 204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:DHGRoup....................................................................................... 206
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:ENCRyption.................................................................................... 204
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:INTegrity......................................................................................... 205
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:IKE:PRF.................................................................................................205
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVFour:TYPE........................................................................... 207
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:ADDRess:LENGth......................................................... 208
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:PCSCf:IPVSix:TYPE..............................................................................207
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
289
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:AUSer........................................................................................................168
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:DUPLoad...................................................................................................168
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:ENConnection........................................................................................... 167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:IPVSix....................................................................................................... 167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STYPe.......................................................................................................167
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:ADD................................................................................................168
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:DELete........................................................................................... 169
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:ENConnection........................................................................................ 170
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:IPVSix.....................................................................................................171
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVFour......................................................... 179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EXTern:PCSCf:ADDRess:IPVSix............................................................180
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:DERegister........................................................................ 178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:ADD............................................................................................. 180
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CREate........................................................................................ 183
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:BEHaviour............................................................................. 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:DELete.................................................................................. 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:FAILurecode..........................................................................181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:IPADdress............................................................................. 181
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:REGexp.................................................................................182
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:RETRyafter............................................................................182
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:SUBexp................................................................................. 183
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:CALL:ID................................................................................... 178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:ADD..................................................................................... 184
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CREate................................................................................ 189
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:ALGorithm............................................... 186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:AMF......................................................... 186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:KEY......................................................... 186
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:OPC.........................................................187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:AUTHenticati:SCHeme.................................................. 185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:DELete...........................................................................185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:ENCRyption...................................... 188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ALGorithm:INTegrity........................................... 188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:IPSec:ENABle................................................................187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PRIVateid.......................................................................185
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:PUBLicuserid<Index>.................................................... 188
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber<s>:RESLength.................................................................... 187
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUSage................................................................................................... 178
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:THReshold:VALue...................................................................................179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:TRANsport:SELection............................................................................. 179
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:ALIGnment........................................................................176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle............................................. 176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:AMR:TYPE.................................................................................175
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:ID..................................................................................... 175
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:CALL:TYPE................................................................................177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:PERForm................................................................................... 177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:ATTRibutes..................................................................... 177
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:UPDate:VIDeo:CODec............................................................................ 176
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:ADD..................................................................................... 190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CREate................................................................................ 195
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:ALIGnment............................................................192
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
290
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle................................. 193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AMR:TYPE.................................................................... 192
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:AUDioboard................................................................... 195
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEARer..........................................................................191
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:BEHaviour......................................................................190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:DELete...........................................................................190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:FORWard.......................................................................194
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:ID................................................................................... 190
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MEDiaendpoin............................................................... 194
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:ALIGnment............................................... 199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:CODec<CodecIdx>:ENABle.....................199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:AMR:TYPE........................................................ 198
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:BEARer............................................................. 198
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:CALL................................................................. 200
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination...................................................... 196
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:SIGType............................................................ 197
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:TYPE................................................................. 197
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:ATTRibutes............................................ 200
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:VIDeo:CODec....................................................199
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination..................................................... 201
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:SEND............................................................... 202
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TEXT................................................................ 202
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:TYPE................................................................ 201
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:SIGNalingtyp..................................................................191
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:ATTRibutes.........................................................193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:VIDeo:CODec................................................................ 193
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:ADDRess:TYPE..................................................................................150
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:ADD...................................................................152
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:DELete.............................................................. 153
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:GIP.........................................................................................151
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:IPADdress..............................................................................151
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:SMASk................................................................................... 151
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ADDRess:TYPE.................................................................................... 154
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:ADD.........................................................................158
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:DELete.................................................................... 158
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MOBile:PREFix:TYPE...........................................................................156
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:ROUTing:TYPE.....................................................................................157
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:ADDRess..................................................................................155
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:DROuter................................................................................... 155
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:ADD.........................................................................156
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:DELete.................................................................... 156
CONFigure:DATA:CONTrol:MTU.................................................................................................................. 150
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:MSAMples......................................................................................... 266
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SAMPles?.......................................................................................... 265
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:SPINterval?........................................................................................265
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic:APP.................................................................... 250
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer:LAYer...................................................................250
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:EXPortdb....................................................................................... 241
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACe<TraceIndex>:TFLowid....................................253
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:DPCP................................................................................ 242
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
291
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:FTTRigger......................................................................... 243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:IPConnect..........................................................................242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:TCPanalysis...................................................................... 242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult:VOIMs............................................................................... 243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:RESult[:ALL].................................................................................. 242
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TOTHreshold............................................................244
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TRTHreshold............................................................ 244
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:TWSThreshold......................................................... 243
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:BITRate.........................................................................223
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:ENABle......................................................................... 221
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:IPADdress.....................................................................222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PCONnection................................................................ 223
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PORT............................................................................ 222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:PROTocol..................................................................... 221
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent<Index>:WSIZe........................................................................... 222
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:PSIZe.....................................................................................................219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:ENABle....................................................................... 219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PORT..........................................................................220
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:PROTocol................................................................... 220
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer<Index>:WSIZe.........................................................................221
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:TDURation.............................................................................................219
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FSIZe.............................................................................................. 236
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PCOunter........................................................................................236
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:PSLength........................................................................................ 237
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:TYPE.............................................................................................. 235
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:CREatelist........................................................................................ 258
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INTerface..........................................................................................260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:ITERation......................................................................................... 259
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PLAYall.............................................................................................260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:REMovelist....................................................................................... 259
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STOPall............................................................................................ 260
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:CRATe........................................................................ 273
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DELay......................................................................... 271
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:DRATe........................................................................ 273
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:ENABle........................................................................270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:IPADdress................................................................... 270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JDIStribut.................................................................... 272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:JITTer..........................................................................272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PLRate........................................................................ 271
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:PRANge...................................................................... 270
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairments<Index>:RRATe........................................................................ 272
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:DIPaddress............................................................................................ 214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:INTerval..................................................................................................214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PCOunt.................................................................................................. 215
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:PSIZe..................................................................................................... 215
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:PING:TIMeout.................................................................................................. 214
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN................................................................................................................. 213
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:RAN:CATaloge?.............................................................................................. 213
CONFigure:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:MCOunt...................................................................................... 227
CONFigure:DATA:MEASurement<inst>:DNSRequests:MICount..................................................................232
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
292
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?......................................................................................................269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?.............................................................................................. 269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe:ALL?............................................................................................. 267
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:STATe?.................................................................................................... 266
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?........................................................................................... 269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?..................................................................................................269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?...................................................................... 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?...............................................................268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?............................................................ 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?...................................................................268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?...................................................................... 268
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?......................................................................................................269
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe:ALL?................................................................................... 233
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:STATe?...........................................................................................233
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPAPplic?................................................................................. 252
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPConnection?......................................................................... 250
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPLayer?.................................................................................. 252
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:DPCP:DPPRotocol?.............................................................................251
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRACes<TraceIndex>:FTHRoughput?..............................253
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:END?...................................................................254
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:FTTRigger:TRIGger:STARt?................................................................254
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:ALL?................................................................................... 248
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe:ALL?.........................................................................................240
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:STATe?................................................................................................ 240
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:ALL?................................................................................245
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:ALL?......................................................................................... 255
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:ALL?............................................................................................................. 226
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?.........................................................................................................226
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?...................................................................................................... 225
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe:ALL?.................................................................................................224
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:STATe?........................................................................................................ 224
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe:ALL?.......................................................................................... 238
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:STATe?................................................................................................. 238
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:FILelist?...................................................................................................263
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe:ALL?............................................................................................262
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:STATe?................................................................................................... 262
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:NRCount?..................................................................................................... 218
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:OVERall?...................................................................................................... 218
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe:ALL?................................................................................................. 216
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING:STATe?.........................................................................................................216
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:PING?..................................................................................................................... 217
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?................................................................................231
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?................................................................................231
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe:ALL?......................................................................................229
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:STATe?............................................................................................. 228
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?.................................................230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?................................................ 230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?.................................................230
FETCh:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?................................................ 230
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:ADELay................................................................................................................. 266
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
293
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests........................................................................................................232
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis............................................................................................................. 239
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPERf..................................................................................................................... 223
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging.............................................................................................................. 237
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay................................................................................................................ 261
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:PING......................................................................................................................215
INITiate:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput.......................................................................................................... 228
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:DLINk?....................................................................................................... 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:LOOPback?............................................................................................... 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TALoopback?.............................................................................................269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TAULink?................................................................................................... 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:DLINk[:CURRent]?........................................................................268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:LOOPback[:CURRent]?................................................................ 268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TALoopback[:CURRent]?..............................................................268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:TAULink[:CURRent]?.................................................................... 268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:TRACe:ULINk[:CURRent]?........................................................................268
READ:DATA:MEAS:ADELay:ULINk?....................................................................................................... 269
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:CLIent?.......................................................................................................... 226
READ:DATA:MEAS:IPERf:SERVer?........................................................................................................225
READ:DATA:MEAS:PING?...................................................................................................................... 217
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:DLINk?................................................................................. 231
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:OVERall:ULINk?................................................................................. 231
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk:EXTended?.................................................. 230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:DLINk[:CURRent]?..................................................230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk:EXTended?.................................................. 230
READ:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:TRACe:OVERall:ULINk[:CURRent]?..................................................230
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:ASERvices:CATalog?.....................................................................................164
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:PRIMary:ADDRess?........................................................ 160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVFour:SECondary:ADDRess?.................................................... 160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:PRIMary:ADDRess?...........................................................160
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:CURRent:IPVSix:SECondary:ADDRess?...................................................... 161
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:LOCal:CATalog?.............................................................................................163
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:TEST:RESults?...............................................................................................165
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:EPDG:CONNections:IMSI?.....................................................................................203
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:USER:CATalog?..............................................................................................169
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:EVENts?........................................................................................................ 173
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:GINFo?.......................................................................................................... 172
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:HISTory?........................................................................................................173
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:MOBile<UE>:STATus?.................................................................................. 175
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:PCSCf:CATalog?........................................................................................... 184
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:RELease:LIST?..............................................................................................177
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:SUBScriber:CATalog?................................................................................... 189
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub:CATalog?................................................................................... 195
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTCall:DESTination:LIST?.................................................. 196
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:VIRTualsub<v>:MTSMs:DESTination:LIST?................................................. 200
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:AUTomatic:ADDResses:CATalog?...........................................................153
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:GIP?..........................................................................................152
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:IPADdress?...............................................................................151
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:CURRent:SMASk?....................................................................................152
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:DHCP:ADDResses:CATalog?.................................................................. 153
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
294
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
List of Commands
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVFour:STATic:ADDResses:CATalog?.................................................................153
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:AUTomatic:PREFixes:CATalog?.................................................................157
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:DROuter?.................................................................................... 155
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:CURRent:IPADdress?................................................................................. 155
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:DHCP:PREFixes:CATalog?........................................................................ 157
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:MANual:ROUTing:CATalog?.......................................................................158
SENSe:DATA:CONTrol:IPVSix:STATic:PREFixes:CATalog?.......................................................................157
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests:RCOunt?.........................................................................................234
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests?.......................................................................................................234
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:FLOWid?............................................................................ 247
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:IPConnect:STATistics?........................................................................ 247
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:DETails?......................................................................... 246
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:TCPanalysis:FLOWid?.........................................................................244
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:FLOWs?...................................................................................256
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:JITTer?.....................................................................................257
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis:VOIMs:PERDtx?.................................................................................. 257
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging:FNAMe?................................................................................................ 236
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:INFofile?................................................................................................. 263
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:PROGress?............................................................................................ 260
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay:TRAFficfile?............................................................................................ 264
SENSe:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput:INTerval?.......................................................................................... 227
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:DNS:STATe.......................................................................................................... 166
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:FTP:STATe........................................................................................................... 170
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:HTTP:STATe........................................................................................................ 171
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:IMS2:STATe......................................................................................................... 172
SOURce:DATA:CONTrol:STATe...................................................................................................................149
SOURce:DATA:MEAS:NIMPairment:STATe............................................................................................273
STOP:DATA:MEAS:ADELay.................................................................................................................... 266
STOP:DATA:MEAS:DNSRequests...........................................................................................................232
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPANalysis................................................................................................................ 239
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPERf........................................................................................................................ 223
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPLogging................................................................................................................. 237
STOP:DATA:MEAS:IPReplay...................................................................................................................261
STOP:DATA:MEAS:PING.........................................................................................................................215
STOP:DATA:MEAS:THRoughput............................................................................................................. 228
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
295
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Index
Index
Symbols
Data application unit

Command reference ................................................. 145
ePDG service status ......................................................... 77

ePDG tab .......................................................................... 76
Event Log
ePDG .......................................................................... 78
Events area ....................................................................... 56
Expiration time
Registration ................................................................. 60
Subscription ................................................................ 60
A
AMR alignment mode ........................................................ 68
Assigning IPv6 address to mobile ..................................... 20
Audio board for IMS .......................................................... 70
Audio codec ...................................................................... 74
Audio delay ..................................................................... 118
Authentication ................................................................... 62
C
Call setup voice over IMS ................................................. 23
Call type ............................................................................ 74
Configuring
DAU IP addresses ...................................................... 18
DAU IP configuration .................................................. 16
DAU measurements ................................................... 22
DAU services .............................................................. 21
Current DAU IP settings .............................................. 39, 40
D
Data application control
DNS tab ...................................................................... 46
ePDG tab .................................................................... 76
FTP tab ....................................................................... 50
HTTP tab .................................................................... 52
IMS tab ....................................................................... 53
IP config tab ................................................................ 40
Overview tab ............................................................... 39
Programming ............................................................ 127
Data application measurements
Audio delay ............................................................... 118
DNS requests ............................................................. 96
IP analysis ................................................................ 101
IP logging .................................................................... 98
IP replay .................................................................... 115
IPerf ............................................................................ 90
Ping ............................................................................. 88
Programming ............................................................ 127
Throughput ................................................................. 94
Data application unit
Data application control .............................................. 38
Data application measurements ................................. 86
Description .................................................................. 11
GUI reference ............................................................. 38
Data pie charts ................................................................ 107
DAU
Web portal .................................................................. 34
Web server ................................................................. 34
DAU unit softkey ............................................................... 85
Delay ............................................................................... 275
DNS requests .................................................................... 96
DNS server info for the mobile .......................................... 48
DNS tab ............................................................................. 46
Drive mapping (DAU) ........................................................ 86
Duplicates rate ................................................................ 283
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
F
Failure code ...................................................................... 60
Flow throughput and event trigger .................................. 110
Foreign DNS server .......................................................... 49
FTP server settings ........................................................... 51
FTP service type ............................................................... 51
FTP tab ............................................................................. 50
FTP user accounts ............................................................ 52
G
General IMS info area ....................................................... 55
General IMS settings ......................................................... 57
H
Hard disk (DAU)
Change drive mapping ................................................ 86
Using ........................................................................... 33
HTTP tab ........................................................................... 52
Hypertext transfer protocol ................................................ 52
I
IMS config dialog box ........................................................ 57
IMS service status ............................................................. 54
IMS services ...................................................................... 23
IMS softkeys ...................................................................... 54
IMS subscriber settings ..................................................... 61
IMS tab .............................................................................. 53
IMS virtual subscribers ...................................................... 64
Internal DNS entries .......................................................... 49
IP address configuration ................................................... 40
IP analysis ....................................................................... 101
IP config tab ...................................................................... 40
IP connectivity ................................................................. 105
IP logging .......................................................................... 98
IP replay .......................................................................... 115
Iperf
Configuring the mobile ................................................ 36
IPerf ...................................................................................90
IPsec ................................................................................. 63
IPv4 address configuration ................................................ 43
J
Jitter ................................................................................ 275
L
LAN DAU connector .......................................................... 12
LAN DAU status ................................................................ 40
296
R&SCMW-B450A/B/D
Index
LAN IPv6 address configuration ........................................ 45
Video codec ................................................................ 70, 74

Virtual subscriber behavior ................................................ 66
Virtual subscribers IMS ..................................................... 64
Voice over IMS .................................................................. 23
Voice over IMS analysis .................................................. 112
Voice over LTE .................................................................. 23
VoIMS ............................................................................... 23
VoLTE ............................................................................... 23
Measurements
Configuring, running ................................................... 22
Media endpoint ..................................................................70
Mobile
Iperf configuration ....................................................... 36
Mobile IPv4 address pool .................................................. 44
Mobile-terminating VoIMS calls ......................................... 72
N
Network drive map ............................................................ 86
Network impairments ...................................................... 275
W
Web portal ......................................................................... 34
Web server
Accessing ................................................................... 34
O
OMA XHTML tests ............................................................ 34
Overview tab
Data application control .............................................. 39
Data application measurements ................................. 87
P
P-CSCF address ......................................................... 58, 59
P-CSCF behavior .............................................................. 60
P-CSCF settings ............................................................... 58
Packet loss rate ............................................................... 285
Ping ................................................................................... 88
Private user ID .................................................................. 62
Programming
Data application control ............................................ 127
Data application measurements ............................... 127
Public user ID .............................................................. 64, 66
R
RAN selection ................................................................... 86
Rebooting the DAU ........................................................... 85
Register mobile to IMS ...................................................... 23
Registration expiration time ............................................... 60
Reordering rate ............................................................... 281
Running
DAU measurements ................................................... 22
DAU services .............................................................. 21
S
Select RAN ........................................................................ 87
Signaling type ..............................................................66, 74
SMS over IMS ............................................................. 23, 75
SMS type ........................................................................... 76
Subscriber settings IMS .................................................... 61
Subscription expiration time .............................................. 60
T
Test setup
Data application unit ................................................... 12
Throughput (DAU) ............................................................. 94
U
Use IMS server as ............................................................. 58
User Manual 1173.9528.02 14
297

CMW DataApplicationUnit UserManual V3!5!21 en 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMW DataApplicationUnit UserManual V3!5!21 en 14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CMW DataApplicationUnit UserManual V3!5!21 en 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R&SCMW-B450A/B/D

Data Application Unit

Test & Measurement

This user manual describes the following R&SCMW options:

R&SCMW-B450A/B/D (Data Application Unit H450A/B/D)

R&SCMW-KA065 (Enabling test software for WLAN Offloading)

R&SCMW-KA100 (Enabling of IP-data interface for IPv4)

R&SCMW-KA120 (Access to DAU on separate CMW)

R&SCMW-KA150 (Extension of IP-data interface for IPv6 and IP multicast)

R&SCMW-KAA20 (IMS basic service)

R&SCMW-KAA21 (IMS advanced service)

R&SCMW-KAA30 (eMBMS service)

R&SCMW-KM050 (IP based measurements)

R&SCMW-KM051 (IP traffic analysis)

R&SCMW-KS104 (EVS speech codec)

2015 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

R&S CMW Models......................................................................................................... 7

How to Read Firmware Application Chapters............................................................ 7

2 What's New in this Revision................................................................10

Adapting the DAU IP Configuration...........................................................................16

IPv4 and IPv6 Address Formats................................................................................... 17

IP Address Configuration Methods............................................................................... 18

Assigning an IPv6 Address to a Mobile.........................................................................20

Configuring and Starting DAU Services................................................................... 21

Configuring and Running DAU Measurements........................................................ 22

Using the IMS Server.................................................................................................. 23

Using the ePDG Service for WLAN Offload.............................................................. 30

Using the eMBMS Service.......................................................................................... 31

Using the Hard Disk of the DAU................................................................................ 33

Accessing the Built-in Web Server............................................................................34

Configuring Iperf on the Mobile.................................................................................36

Configuring Wireshark for IPsec............................................................................... 36

Data Application Control Dialog................................................................................ 38

User Manual 1173.9528.02 14

Common Softkeys, Hotkeys and Parameters............................................................... 85

Data Application Measurements................................................................................86

DNS Requests Tab....................................................................................................... 96

IP Analysis Tab........................................................................................................... 101

IP Replay Tab............................................................................................................. 115

Audio Delay Tab..........................................................................................................118

Network Impairments.................................................................................................. 122

Common Softkeys and Hotkeys..................................................................................124

Data Application Control.......................................................................................... 127

Rebooting the DAU..................................................................................................... 127

Configuring General IP Settings..................................................................................127

Configuring IPv4 Settings............................................................................................128

Configuring IPv6 Settings............................................................................................128

Configuring DNS Server Settings................................................................................129

Configuring the FTP Service....................................................................................... 130

Configuring the HTTP Service.................................................................................... 131

Configuring IMS Services............................................................................................131

Configuring the ePDG Service.................................................................................... 135

Data Application Measurements..............................................................................136

Configuring Global Settings........................................................................................ 136

Configuring Network Impairments...............................................................................137

Performing a Ping Measurement................................................................................ 137

Performing an IPerf Measurement.............................................................................. 138

User Manual 1173.9528.02 14

Performing a Throughput Measurement..................................................................... 139

Monitoring DNS Requests...........................................................................................139